Sri Sivasubramaniya Nadar College of Engineering

(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

Rajiv Gandhi Salai (OMR), Kalavakkam – 603110

Regulations 2021

Curriculum and Syllabi for

Bachelor of Engineering
Electronics and Communication Engineering
 Vision and Mission of the Department

Vision:
To be in a position of enhanced national and global reputation as a department offering
excellent educational programmes and undertaking internationally recognized research and
development activities in electronics and communication engineering

Mission:
• Continued focus on excellence in teaching and learning by investing in faculty and staff
development and resources.
• Promoting an all-round development of our students through curricular and co-curricular
activities that instill a spirit of social responsibility, innovation, creativity and
entrepreneurship.
• Attracting a larger number of the best students at both the graduate and undergraduate
level
• Promoting high-quality research leading to publications in reputed journals and patents.
• Building partnerships with leading academic institutions and industries.
• Nurturing a learning and work environment that makes the department one of the best
ECE communities for students, faculty and staff.

Programme Educational Objectives

PEO1 (Core Knowledge Development): Be competent in applying electronics and

communication engineering principles to develop socially and environmentally acceptable
engineering solutions
PEO2 (Professional development): Find fulfilling career in electronic and communication
engineering or associated industries or higher education and research, or as entrepreneurs

PEO3 (Attitude towards lifelong-learning): Develop the ability and attitude to adapt to
evolving technological and social challenges
 Programme Outcomes
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of the engineering practice.
PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
 PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.

Programme Specific Outcomes

PSO1: Design, develop and analyze electronic systems through application of relevant
mathematics and engineering principles

PSO2: Design, develop and analyze communication systems through application of

fundamentals from wireless communication network, signal processing, and RF &
electromagnetics

PSO3: Adapt to emerging electronics and communication technologies and develop

innovative solutions for existing and newer problems

Mapping of Programme Educational Objectives with Programme Outcomes:

The correlation between the defined POs and the PEOs is given in Table

Correlation between the defined POs and the PEOs

Graduate Attributes/POs PSOs
PEOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

PEO01 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 1
PEO02 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2
PEO03 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3
Mapping Criterion: Strong - 3 Significant - 2 Reasonable - 1
 Mapping of Programme Outcomes with Graduate Attributes

Table 2: Mapping of Programme outcomes with NBA Graduate Attributes

Programme Outcomes NBA’s GAs
PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,
engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the GA1
solution of complex engineering problems
PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and
analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated
GA2
conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and
engineering sciences.
PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex
engineering problems and design system components or processes that
meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public GA3
health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based
knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,
GA4
analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,
resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and
GA5
modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations.
PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual
knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and
GA6
the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering
practice.
PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the
professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, GA7
and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
GA8
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as
GA9
a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering
activities with the engineering community and with society at large, such
as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design GA10
documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply
GA11
these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage
projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest GA12
context of technological change.
 MAPPING OF COURSES WITH POs AND PSOs

COURSE OUTCOMES PROGRAMME OUTCOMES PSOs

Sem Course Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

Technical English 2 3 2
Matrices and Calculus 3 2 1 1
Engineering Physics 3 2 1
Engineering Chemistry 3 2 1
I Problem Solving and Programming in
2 2 2 1
Python
Engineering Graphics 3 2 2 2 3
Programming in Python Lab 3 3 1 1 3 2
Physics and Chemistry Lab 3 3

Complex Functions and Laplace

3 2 1 1
Transforms
Basic Electrical and Instrumentation
3 2 1 2 1
Engineering
Fundamentals of Electronic Devices
and Circuits 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 1
II Environmental Science 3 2 1
Humanities I-Elective
Circuit and Network Analysis 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
Design Thinking and Workshop
3 2 1 1 1
Practices Lab
Circuits and Devices Lab 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 1
Linear Algebra and Numerical
3 3 1 1 1
Methods
Humanities II -Universal Human
2 3 3 2 3
Values: Understanding Harmony
Analog Circuits 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1

III Digital System Design 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 3 2

OOPS and Data Structures 1 2 3 2 1 1 1
Signals and Systems 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2
Analog Circuits Lab 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
OOPS and Data Structures Lab 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 1 1
Microcontrollers 3 3 2 2 1 3 1
Indian Constitution
Digital Signal Processing 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
 Control Systems Engineering 3 3 3 2 2
IV
Electromagnetic Fields 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
Principles of Communication Systems 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 1 3
Microcontrollers Lab 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
Digital Signal Processing Lab 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 2

Digital Communication 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 1

Transmission Lines and Waveguides

3 3 2 1 3 3 1
Communication Networks 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
Principles of VLSI Design 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
Management Elective

Information Theory
and Coding 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 2
V
Advanced Digital
Professional Signal Processing
Elective I 3 3 3 3 1 3 1
Computer
Architecture and
Organization 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 2
MEMS & NEMS 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
Analog and Digital Communication
Lab 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
VLSI Design Lab 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3

Wireless Communication 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 2
System Design for IoT 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3

Microwave and Antenna Engineering

2 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2
Machine Learning 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 3 1 3
Open Elective - I
VI
Introduction to Radar
and Satellite 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 2 1
Communication
Digital Image &
Professional Video Processing 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
Elective – II
Advanced
Microcontrollers 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
Nano Electronics 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3
Microwave and Antennas Lab 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 2
System Design for IoT Lab 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3
 High Frequency Communication
Systems 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
Underwater Acoustic
System 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 2 2
Speech Technology 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Professional Embedded and Real
Elective – III Time Operating
Systems 2 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
MIC and RF Systems
Design 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
Wireless Adhoc and
Sensor Networks 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
Optimization in
Wireless
Professional Communication 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
VII Elective – IV ASIC and FPGA
Based Design 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
Electromagnetic
Interference and
Compatibility 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 3
Wireless Technologies
2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
Communication
Professional Network Security 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 3
Elective – V
Mixed Signal Design
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
Digital Signal
Integrity 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 1
High Frequency Communication Lab 2 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
Project Phase I 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
Industrial Training / Internship

Cognitive Radio 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2
Computer Vision 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
Professional
Elective – VI CMOS Analog IC
Design 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
VIII
Sensors, Actuators
and Interfaces 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
Open Elective – II
Project Work Stage – II 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS (SDG)

 SDG Description
SDG1 No Poverty End poverty in all its forms everywhere
End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition,
SDG 2 Zero Hunger
and promote sustainable agriculture
Good health and well Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all
SDG 3
being ages
Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and
SDG 4 Quality education
promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
SDG 5 Gender Equality Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Clean water and Ensure availability and sustainable management of water
SDG 6
sanitation and sanitation for all
Affordable and clean Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and
SDG 7
energy modern energy for all
Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic
Decent work and
SDG 8 growth, full and productive employment and decent work
Economic Growth
for all
Industry, Innovation and Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and
SDG 9
Infrastructure sustainable industrialization, and foster innovation
SDG 10 Reducing Inequality Reduce income inequality within and among countries
Sustainable cities and Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe,
SDG 11
communities resilient, and sustainable
Responsible consumption Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns
SDG 12
and production
Take urgent action to combat climate change and its
SDG 13 Climate action impacts by regulating emissions and promoting
developments in renewable energy
Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine
SDG 14 Life below water
resources for sustainable development
Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of
terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat
SDG 15 Life on Land
desertification, and halt and reverse land degradation and
halt biodiversity loss
Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable
Peace, justice and string
SDG 16 development, provide access to justice for all and build
Institutions
effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels
Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the
SDG 17 Partnerships for the goals
global partnership for sustainable development
MAPPING OF SUBJECTS RELEVANT TO SDG

Sustainable Development Goals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Technical English

Matrices and Calculus

Engineering Physics

Engineering


Chemistry
Problem Solving and
Programming in

Python

Engineering Graphics

Programming in


Python Lab

Physics and


Chemistry Lab
Complex Functions
and Laplace

Transforms
Basic Electrical and
Instrumentation

Engineering
Fundamentals of
Electronic Devices

and Circuits

Environmental








Science (Non-credit)

Design Thinking and

Engineering Practices

Lab

Circuits and Devices

Lab
Linear Algebra and


Numerical Methods

Universal Human
Values –



Understanding
Harmony
 Sustainable Development Goals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Analog Circuits

Digital System Design

OOPS and Data


Structures

Signals and Systems

Analog Circuits Lab

OOPS and Data


Structures Lab

Microcontrollers

Indian Constitution


(Non-credit)
Digital Signal


Processing

Control Systems


Engineering

Electromagnetic


Fields

Principles of
Communication

Systems

Microcontrollers Lab

Digital Signal


Processing Lab

Digital


Communication

Transmission Lines


and Waveguides
Communication


Networks

Principles of VLSI


Design

Analog and Digital

Communication Lab

VLSI Design Lab

 Sustainable Development Goals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Wireless


Communication

System Design for

IoT

Microwave and


Antenna Engineering

Machine Learning

Microwave and


Antennas Lab

System Design for

IoT Lab

High Frequency
Communication

Systems

High Frequency


Communication Lab

Project Work Phase I

Industrial Training




/Internship*

Project Work Phase II

Information Theory


and Coding
Advanced Digital


Signal Processing

Computer
Architecture and

Organization

MEMS & NEMS

Introduction to Radar
and Satellite

Communication

Digital Image &

Video Processing
Advanced


Microcontrollers

Nano Electronics

 Sustainable Development Goals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Underwater Acoustic


System

Speech Technology

Embedded and Real
Time Operating

Systems

MIC and RF Systems

Design

Wireless Adhoc and

Sensor Networks
Optimization in
Wireless

Communication

ASIC and FPGA

Based Design

Electromagnetic
Interference and

Compatibility

Wireless


Technologies
Communication


Network Security

Mixed Signal Design

Digital Signal


Integrity

Cognitive Radio

Introduction to


Computer Vision
CMOS Analog IC


Design

Sensors, Actuators


and Interfaces

Language and



Communication
Fundamentals of



Linguistics
 Sustainable Development Goals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Film Appreciation

Human relations at





work

Applications of
Psychology in


everyday life

Understanding
Society and Culture


through Literature

Principles of




Management

Total quality





Management
Work ethics,
Corporate social








responsibility and
Governance
 I to VIII semesters Curriculum
SEMESTER I
Sl. No. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY
CONTACT
L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 UEN2176 Technical English HS 4 2 0 2 3
2 UMA2176 Matrices and Calculus BS 4 3 1 0 4
3 UPH2176 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4 UCY2176 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
Problem Solving and
5 UGE2176 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming in Python
6 UGE2177 Engineering Graphics ES 5 1 0 4 3
PRACTICALS
Programming in Python
7 UGE2197 ES 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
8 UGS2197 Physics and Chemistry Lab BS 3 0 0 3 1.5
TOTAL 28 15 1 12 22

SEMESTER II
Sl. COURSE CATEGO CONTACT
No. COURSE TITLE L T P EL C
CODE RY PERIODS
THEORY
Complex Functions and
1 UMA2276 BS 4 3 1 0 0 4
Laplace Transforms
Basic Electrical and
2 UEE2251 ES 3 3 0 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Fundamentals of Electronic
3 UEC2201 ES 4 3 0 1 3 4.5
Devices and Circuits

4 UCY2276 Environmental Science MC* 3 3 0 0 0 0

5 Humanities I-Elective HS 4 2 0 2 0 3
6 UEC2202 Circuit and Network Analysis ES 4 3 1 0 0 4
PRACTICALS
Design Thinking and
7 UGE2297 ES 3 0 0 3 0 1.5
Engineering Practices Lab
8 UEC2211 Circuits and Devices Lab ES 2 0 0 2 0 1
TOTAL 27 17 2 8 3 21
*Non-credit
 SEMESTER III
COURSE CONTACT
Sl. No. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
Linear Algebra and
1 UMA2353 BS 4 3 1 0 4
Numerical Methods
Universal Human Values
2 UHS2376 2: Understanding HS 4 2 0 2 3
Harmony
3 UEC2301 Analog Circuits PC 3 3 0 0 3

4 UEC2302 Digital System Design PC 5 3 0 2 4

5 UEC2304 OOPS and Data Structures ES 3 3 0 0 3

6 UEC2376 Signals and Systems ES 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS

7 UEC2311 Analog Circuits Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5

OOPS and Data Structures

8 UEC2312 ES 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
TOTAL 28 17 1 10 23

SEMESTER IV
Sl. No. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY
CONTACT
L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 UEC2401 Microcontrollers PC 3 3 0 0 3

2 AHS2476 Indian Constitution MC* 3 3 0 0 0

3 UEC2402 Digital Signal Processing PC 3 3 0 0 3

Control Systems
4 UEE2476 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5 UEC2403 Electromagnetic Fields PC 4 3 1 0 4
Principles of
6 UEC2404 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Systems
PRACTICALS

7 UEC2411 Microcontrollers Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5

Digital Signal Processing

8 UEC2412 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
TOTAL 25 18 1 6 19
* Non-credit
 SEMESTER V
Sl. No. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY
CONTACT
L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 UEC2501 Digital Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
Transmission Lines and
2 UEC2502 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Waveguides
3 UEC2503 Communication Networks PC 5 3 0 2 4

4 UEC2504 Principles of VLSI Design PC 3 3 0 0 3

5 Management –Elective HS 3 3 0 0 3

6 Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS
Analog and Digital
7 UEC2511 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Communication Lab

8 UEC2512 VLSI Design Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5

TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22

SEMESTER VI
Sl. No. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY
CONTACT
L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 UEC2601 Wireless Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3

2 UEC2602 System Design for IoT PC 3 3 0 0 3

Microwave and Antenna
3 UEC2603 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4 UEC2604 Machine Learning PC 5 3 0 2 4

5 Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3

6 Open Elective I OE 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS
Microwave and Antennas
7 UEC2611 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab

8 UEC2612 System Design for IoT Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5

TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22
 SEMESTER VII
Sl. No.COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY
CONTACT
L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
High Frequency
1 UEC2701 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Systems
2 Professional Elective III PE 3 3 0 0 3

3 Professional Elective IV PE 3 3 0 0 3

4 Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS
High Frequency
5 UEC2711 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Communication Lab
6 UEC2718 Project Work Phase I EEC 6 0 0 6 3
Industrial Training
7 UEC2716 EEC 0 0 0 0 2
/Internship*
TOTAL 22 12 0 10 19
* The students will undergo 4 weeks Industrial training / Internship during previous vacation

SEMESTER VIII
S. No.COURSE
CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 Professional Elective VI PE 3 3 0 0 3

2 Open Elective II OE 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS
3 UEC2818 Project Work Phase II EEC 16 0 0 16 8
TOTAL 22 6 0 16 14

Total No of Credits: 162

Honours Degree Specialization in “Internet of Things”

 CATEGORY WISE LISTING OF COURSES

HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)

Sl. Course Contact
Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEN2176 Technical English HS 4 2 0 2 3
2 Humanities I-Elective HS 4 2 0 2 3
Universal Human Values
3 UHS2376 2: Understanding HS 4 2 0 2 3
Harmony
4 Management – Elective HS 3 3 0 0 3

BASIC SCIENCES (BS)

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UMA2176 Matrices and Calculus BS 4 3 1 0 4
2 UPH2176 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3 UCY2176 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3

4 UGS2197Physics and Chemistry 3 1.5

BS 0 0 3
Laboratory
Complex Functions and
5 UMA2276 BS 4 3 1 0 4
Laplace Transforms
Linear Algebra and
6 UMA2353 BS 4 3 1 0 4
Numerical Methods

ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P EL C
No Code Periods
Problem Solving and
1 UGE2176 ES 3 3 0 0 0 3
Programming in Python
2 UGE2177 Engineering Graphics ES 5 1 0 4 0 3

3 UGE2197 Programming in Python 3 0 1.5

ES 0 0 3
Laboratory
Basic Electrical and
4 UEE2251 ES 3 3 0 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Fundamentals of Electronic
5 UEC2201 ES 4 3 0 1 3 4.5
Devices and Circuits
Circuit and Network
6 UEC2202 ES 4 3 1 0 0 4
Analysis
 Design Thinking and
7 UGE2297 ES 3 0 0 3 0 1.5
Engineering Practices Lab
8 UEC2211 Circuits and Devices Lab ES 2 0 0 2 0 1
9 UEC2304 OOPS and Data Structures ES 3 3 0 0 0 3
10 UEC2376 Signals and Systems ES 3 3 0 0 0 3
OOPS and Data Structures
11 UEC2312 ES 3 0 0 3 0 1.5
Lab

PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEC2301 Analog Circuits PC 3 3 0 0 3
2 UEC2302 Digital System Design PC 5 3 0 2 4
3 UEC2311 Analog Circuits Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
4 UEC2401 Microcontrollers PC 3 3 0 0 3
5 UEC2402 Digital Signal Processing PC 3 3 0 0 3
Control Systems
6 UEE2476 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
7 UEC2403 Electromagnetic Fields PC 4 3 1 0 4
Principles of
8 UEC2404 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Systems
9 UEC2411 Microcontrollers Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Digital Signal Processing
10 UEC2412 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
11 UEC2501 Digital Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
Transmission Lines and
12 UEC2502 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Waveguides
13 UEC2503 Communication Networks PC 5 3 0 2 4
14 UEC2504 Principles of VLSI Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
Analog and Digital
15 UEC2511 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Communication Lab
16 UEC2512 VLSI Design Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
17 UEC2601 Wireless Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
18 UEC2602 System Design for IoT PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microwave and Antenna
19 UEC2603 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
20 UEC2604 Machine Learning PC 5 3 0 2 4
Microwave and Antennas
21 UEC2611 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
22 UEC2612 System Design for IoT Lab PC 3 0 0 3 1.5
High Frequency
23 UEC2701 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Systems
High Frequency
24 UEC2711 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Communication Lab

MANDATORY COURSES (MC)

Sl. Course Contact
Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UCY2276 Environmental Science MC 3 3 0 0 0
2 AHS2476 Indian Constitution MC 3 3 0 0 0

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods

Information Theory and

1 UEC2521 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Coding
Advanced Digital Signal
2 UEC2522 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
Computer Architecture and
3 UEC2523 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Organization
4 UEC2524 MEMS & NEMS PE 3 3 0 0 3
Introduction to Radar and
5 UEC2621 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Satellite Communication
Digital Image & Video
6 UEC2622 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
7 UEC2623 Advanced Microcontrollers PE 3 3 0 0 3
8 UEC2624 Nano Electronics PE 3 3 0 0 3
9 UEC2721 Underwater Acoustic System PE 3 3 0 0 3
10 UEC2722 Speech Technology PE 3 3 0 0 3
Embedded and Real Time
11 UEC2723 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Operating Systems
12 UEC2724 MIC and RF Systems Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
13 UEC2725 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
 Optimization in Wireless
14 UEC2726 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
ASIC and FPGA Based
15 UEC2727 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Design
Electromagnetic
16 UEC2728 Interference and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Compatibility
17 UEC2729 Wireless Technologies PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Network
18 UEC2731 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Security
19 UEC2732 Mixed Signal Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
20 UEC2733 Digital Signal Integrity PE 3 3 0 0 3
21 UEC2821 Cognitive Radio PE 3 3 0 0 3
Introduction to Computer
22 UEC2824 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Vision
23 UEC2822 CMOS Analog IC Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
Sensors, Actuators and
24 UEC2823 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Interfaces

EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSE (EEC)

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEC2718 Project Phase I EEC 6 0 0 6 3
Industrial Training
2 UEC2716 EEC 0 0 0 0 2
/Internship
3 UEC2818 Project Phase II EEC 16 0 0 16 8

HUMANITIES I- ELECTIVE (Semester II)

Course Contact
Sl. No Course Title Category L T P C
Code Periods
Language and
1 UEN2241 HS 4 2 0 2 3
Communication
2 UEN2242 Fundamentals of Linguistics HS 4 2 0 2 3
3 UHS2243 Film Appreciation HS 4 2 0 2 3
4 UHS2241 Human relations at work HS 4 2 0 2 3
Applications of Psychology
5 UHS2242 HS 4 2 0 2 3
in everyday life
 Understanding Society and
6 UEN2243 HS 4 2 0 2 3
Culture through Literature

MANAGEMENT ELECTIVE (Semester V)

Course Contact
Sl. No Course Title Category L T P C
Code Periods

1 UBA2541 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3

2 UBA2542 Total quality Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
Work ethics, Corporate
3 UBA2543 social responsibility and HS 3 3 0 0 3
Governance

PROGRAM ELECTIVES
SEMESTER V
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I
Sl. Course Contact
Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
Information Theory and
1 UEC2521 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Coding
Advanced Digital Signal
2 UEC2522 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
Computer Architecture and
3 UEC2523 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Organization
4 UEC2524 MEMS & NEMS PE 3 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER VI
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
Introduction to Radar and
1 UEC2621 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Satellite Communication
Digital Image & Video
2 UEC2622 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
3 UEC2623 Advanced Microcontrollers PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 UEC2624 Nano Electronics PE 3 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER VII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEC2721 Underwater Acoustic System PE 3 3 0 0 3
2 UEC2722 Speech Technology PE 3 3 0 0 3
Embedded and Real Time
3 UEC2723 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Operating Systems
4 UEC2724 MIC and RF Systems Design PE 3 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER VII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
1 UEC2725 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
Optimization in Wireless
2 UEC2726 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
ASIC and FPGA Based
3 UEC2727 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Design
Electromagnetic
4 UEC2728 Interference and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Compatibility

SEMESTER VII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – V

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEC2729 Wireless Technologies PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Network
2 UEC2731 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Security
3 UEC2732 Mixed Signal Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 UEC2733 Digital Signal Integrity PE 3 3 0 0 3

SEMESTER VIII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – VI

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title Category L T P C
No Code Periods
1 UEC2821 Cognitive Radio PE 3 3 0 0 3
Introduction to Computer
2 UEC2824 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Vision
3 UEC2822 CMOS Analog IC Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
Sensors, Actuators and
4 UEC2823 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Interfaces
 Specialization in Communication Specialization in Signal Processing
Specialization in Circuits, Devices and
Specialization in RF and MEMS
Systems

DISTRIBUTION OF CREDITS

Semester HS BS ES PC PE OE EEC MC* TOTAL

I 3 11.5 7.5 22
II 3 4 14 0 21
III 3 4 7.5 8.5 23
IV 19 0 19
V 3 16 3 22
VI 16 3 3 22
VII 5 9 5 19
VIII 3 3 8 14
TOTAL 12 19.5 29 64.5 18 6 13 0 162
*Mandatory courses -no credits
Courses for Honours Specialization

Sl. Course Contact

Course Title L T P EL C
No Code Periods
Embedded Group (Any two)
Advanced
1 UEC2623 3 3 0 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
Embedded and Real Time
2 UEC2723 3 3 0 0 0 3
Operating Systems
Sensors, Actuators and
3 UEC2823 3 3 0 0 0 3
Interfaces
4 UEC2H61 Embedded Programming 4 2 0 2 0 3
IoT Group (Any two)
5 UEC2H21 IoT Architectures 3 3 0 0 0 3
IoT Communication
6 UEC2H22 3 3 0 0 0 3
Technologies
7 UEC2H23 Data Science for IoT 3 3 0 0 0 3
Security and Privacy in
8 UEC2H24 3 3 0 0 0 3
IoT
Applications Group (Mandatory)
9 UEC2H25 Industrial IoT 4.0 3 3 0 0 0 3
 10 UEC2417 Project Work in IoT 2 0 0 2 6 3

DETAILED SYLLABI
COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEN2176 TECHNICAL ENGLISH 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
• To enhance the competence in reading and comprehending texts drawn from
engineering and technology.
• To improve the ability of the students to write proposals, reports, and letters.
• To develop speaking skills of the students to make technical presentations,
participate in group discussions and take part in public speaking.
• To strengthen the listening skills of the students to enable them to listen and
comprehend lectures and talks (online and face to face) and quickly decipher deeper
levels of meaning.

UNIT I 9

Language development: Subject-Verb agreement, Tenses (simple), Conjunctions,

Numerical adjective.
Vocabulary development: Root words – Prefixes & Suffixes, Standard abbreviations
Reading: Comprehension of short technical texts - skimming and
scanning.
Writing: Describing an object, the process of an event/experiment and
others, Paragraph Writing.
Listening: Listening for taking notes and seeking clarifications
(classroom lectures/ ted talks etc),
Speaking: Self-introduction and introducing others/short conversations
in formal and informal contexts.

UNIT II 9

Language development: The pronouns-antecedent agreement, Tenses-continuous, If

conditionals, Adverbs
Vocabulary development: Collocations and fixed expressions, Avoidance of Jargons
Reading: Comprehension of longer texts – (Interpretative and Critical
levels of meaning),
Writing: Writing definitions (single sentence and extended), Expository
and Persuasive Essays,
Listening: Listening Comprehension Tasks
 Speaking: Making technical presentations

UNIT III 9

Language development: Prepositions, Tenses-perfect, Articles, Embedded sentences

Vocabulary development: Compound words, Formal and informal vocabulary
Reading: Reading Reviews, advertisements, SOPs for higher studies

Writing: Writing instruction and recommendations, formal and

informal letters/ emails, Writing SOPs
Listening: Listening to longer technical talks and discussion
Speaking: Demonstrating working mechanisms

UNIT IV 9

Language development: Reported speech, Active and Passive voices, Framing

‘Wh’ and ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ questions
Vocabulary development: Technical vocabulary, Verbal analogies
Reading: Reading industrial case studies, interpreting technical text and
making notes
Writing: Interpreting charts and graphs, writing blogs and vlogs
Listening: Listening to telephonic conversations and online interviews

Speaking: Participating in group discussions

UNIT V 9

Language development: Phrasal verbs, clauses, compound and complex sentences

Vocabulary development: Single-word substitutes, Vocabulary retention strategies,

Reading: Reading for IELTS, GER, TOEFL

Writing: Writing proposals and reports, writing minutes of
the meeting,
Listening: Listening Skils for Proficiency Tests like IELTS
Speaking: Job Interviews ( face to face and online ) – basics

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO 1: To read and comprehend texts (technical) effectively.
CO 2: To write proposals, reports, emails, letters, SOPs meeting professional
expectations.
CO 3: To Improve Vocabulary (use of right collocations, idioms and phrases etc).
CO 4: To enhance their grammatical competency for writing and speaking.
CO 5: To improve their ability to listen and comprehend at deeper levels.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Praveen Sam, D., and Shoba N, A., Course in Technical English, Cambridge
University Press, New Delhi, 2020.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sudharshana,N.P., and Saveetha, C., English for Technical Communication,
CambridgeUniversity Press, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Raman, Meenakshi, Sharma, and Sangeetha, Technical Communication Principles
andPractice, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Kumar, Suresh, E., Engineering English, Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad, 2015.
4. Booth L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, 2014.
5. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, 2007.
6. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges,
CengageLearning, USA, 2007.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UMA2176 MATRICES AND CALCULUS 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES
The objective of this course is to enable the student to
• To reduce quadratic form to canonical form of a matrix and identify its nature
• To analyse the convergence of infinite series
• To study the concept of evolute and envelope
• To find the extreme values for a function of two variables
• To compute area of closed surface and volume of solids using multiple integrals

UNIT I MATRICES 12
Characteristic equation - Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Properties of
eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – statement and applications,
Diagonalization of matrices – Similarity transformation - Quadratic form - Reduction of a
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.

UNIT II SEQUENCES AND SERIES 12

Sequences - Definition and examples, Series - Types of Convergence, Series of positive terms,
Tests of convergence - Comparison test, Integral test and D’Alembert’s ratio test, Alternating
series – Leibnitz’s test, Series of positive and negative terms, Absolute and conditional
convergence.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Curvature, radius of curvature - Cartesian and parametric co-ordinates – Centre of curvature –
Circle of curvature in Cartesian form, Evolutes, Envelopes (including two parameter family),
Evolute as envelope of normal.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Partial derivatives – Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit functions – Jacobian and its
properties – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of
two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates – Change of order of integration, Area
enclosed by plane curves – Change of variables in double integrals, Triple integrals.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Identify the nature of quadratic form by reducing it to canonical form

CO2: Analyse the convergence of a given infinite series
CO3: Find evolute of a given curve and envelope of family of curves
CO4: Find the extrema of function of two variables
CO5: Evaluate the double and triple integrals
CO6: Application of extreme points of functions and multiple integrals in engineering
problems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition, 2018.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 10th
Edition, 2016.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Ninth Edition,
Laxmi Publications Pvt Ltd., 2016.
2. James Stewart, Calculus: Early Transcendental, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 7th
Edition, 2013.
3. Dass, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma,” Higher Engineering Mathematics”, S. Chand Private
Ltd., 2011.
4. Srimanta Pal and Subodh C. Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University Press,
2015.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1

CO2 3 2 1

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 1

CO5 3 2 1

CO6 3 2 1 1
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UPH2176 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES

The objective of this course is to enable the student to

• Comprehend and identify different crystal structures and their imperfections.

• Explain the elastic and thermal properties of materials and understand their
significance.
• Develop an understanding of quantum mechanical phenomena and their applications.
• Provide an overview of the characteristics of sound, architectural acoustics and the
production, detection and applications of ultrasound.
• Explain the origin of laser action, production of laser, fibre optics and their
applications.

UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials– single crystals - Lattice – Unit cell
– Bravais lattice – Lattice planes – Miller indices – d spacing in cubic lattice – Calculation of
number of atoms per unit cell – Atomic radius – Coordination number – Packing factor for SC,
BCC, FCC and HCP structures – Diamond and graphite structures (qualitative treatment) -
Crystal Imperfections – Point, line (Edge and Screw dislocations –Burger vectors) Surface
(stacking faults) and Volume defects.

UNIT II PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Properties of matter: Elasticity- Hooke’s law - Relationship between three moduli of elasticity–
stress -strain diagram– Poisson’s ratio –Factors affecting elasticity– Torsional stress &
deformations – Twisting couple – Torsion pendulum - theory and experiment–bending of beams-
bending moment– cantilever: theory and experiment–uniform and non-uniform bending: theory
and experiment-I-shaped girders.
Thermal Physics: Modes of heat transfer – thermal conduction, convection and radiation –
Newton’s law of cooling - thermal conductivity- Lee’s disc method for bad conductor – Radial
heat flow – Rubber tube method – conduction through compound media (series and parallel) –
Formation of ice on ponds.

UNIT III ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

Acoustics: Classification and characteristics of Sound - decibel - Weber–Fechner law – Sabine’s

formula - derivation using growth and decay method ––factors affecting acoustics of buildings
and their remedies - Methods of determination of Absorption Coefficient. Ultrasonics: Production
of ultrasonics by Magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods – acoustic grating -Non Destructive
Testing – pulse echo system through transmission and reflection modes - A, B and C – scan
displays.
UNIT IV QUANTAM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton Effect. Theory and experimental
verification – Properties of Matter waves – wave particle duality - Schrödinger’s wave equation
– Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical significance of wave function –
Particle in a one dimensional box and extension to three dimensional box – Degeneracy of
electron energy states - Scanning electron microscope - Transmission electron microscope.
UNIT V PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS 9

Photonics: Spontaneous and stimulated emission- Population inversion -Einstein’s A and

Bcoefficients –Conditions for Laser action - Types of lasers – Nd: YAG, & CO2 lasers-Basics of
diode lasers-Industrial and Medical Applications. Fibre optics: Principle and propagation of light
in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle - Types of optical fibres (material,
refractive index, mode) –Losses in fibers - attenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre Optical
Communication system (Block diagram) - Active and passive fibre sensors.- pressure and
displacement.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES

On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Analyze crystal structures and the influence of imperfections on their properties.
CO2: Demonstrate and explain the general concepts of elastic and thermal properties of
materials.
CO3: Explain quantum mechanical theories to correlate with experimental results and their
applications to material diagnostics.
CO4: Analyze the applications of acoustics and ultrasonics to engineering and medical
disciplines.
CO5: Elucidate the principle and working of lasers and optical fibers, and their applications
in the field of industry, medicine and telecommunication.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gaur, R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
2. Serway, R.A., & Jewett, J.W., Physics for Scientists and Engineers, Cengage Learning,
2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. Principles of Physics, Wiley, 2015.

2. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, WH
Freeman, 2007.
3. Avadhanulu, M. N., Kshirsagar, P. G, A text book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &
Co. Ltd., Ninth Revised Edition, 2012.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UCY2176 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge to the students on the basic concepts of chemistry and properties
of materials for various engineering applications

UNIT I ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR NANOCHEMISTRY 9

Atoms- Atomic orbitals, Molecules- Molecular orbitals. Nanoparticles and its uniqueness.
Distinction between molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials. Classification of
nanoparticles. Size dependent Properties-Thermal, Optical, Chemical, Electronic and
Mechanical. Synthesis of nanomaterials - bottom-up and top-down approaches-Techniques-
Colloidal, hydrothermal, electrodeposition, chemical vapour deposition, laser ablation.
Objectives of surface modification of nanoparticles. Synthesis and applications - Carbon Nano
Tubes (CNT) - Gold nanoparticle

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Conductivity of electrolytes - factors influencing conductivity- Conductometric titration and its
applications -estimation of strong acid, estimation of mixture of strong and weak acids and
estimation of BaCl2. Electrochemical cell-redox reaction-origin of electrode potential, Types
of electrode, Measurement of electrode potential and emf of the electrochemical cell -reference
electrode- saturated calomel electrode and Ag/AgCl electrode - Ion selective electrode-glass
electrode measurement of pH –Potentiometric titrations- estimation of ferrous ion and
estimation of strong acid. Problems based on all the above concepts.

UNIT III CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Corrosion-Definition-Classification of corrosion-Chemical corrosion – Pilling – Bedworth rule –
electrochemical corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – differential aeration corrosion
– factors influencing corrosion – corrosion control – selection of materials - sacrificial anode and
impressed current cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – protective coatings – paints –
constituents and functions – metallic coatings – electroplating (Au) and electroless (Ni) plating.

UNIT IV PHASE EQUILIBRIA 9

Phase Rule - Definition and explanation of terms involved with suitable examples- Phase –
Components – Degrees of Freedom –Applications and limitations of Phase Rule, One component
system - H2O Two component systems – Construction of phase diagram by Thermal Analysis
(or) Cooling curves – Condensed Phase Rule - Simple eutectic systems: Pb-Ag system – System
with congruent melting point: Zn-Mg – System with incongruent melting point: Ni-Cd

UNIT V SYNTHESIS AND APPLICATIONS OF INDUSTRIAL POLIMERS 9

Polymers and Polymerization: definition, classification - types of polymerization: addition and
condensation –mechanism of addition polymerization (cationic, anionic, free radical and
coordination polymerization)-Properties: Glass Transition temperature, Average Molecular
weight and its determination by viscosity method. Polymer composites (fibre reinforced plastics)-
preparation, properties and application of engineering plastics Epoxy resin, Polyurethans, Nylon
6:6, Polycarbonate, PS, PVC and PET

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to demonstrate understanding on:
CO1: The unique properties of nano-particles and their applications
CO2: The principles of electrochemistry and its application for quantitative analysis
CO3: The various types of corrosion under normal to severe corrosive environments and
their control measures
CO4: Construction of phase diagram and its application to analyse simple eutectic systems
CO5: The synthesis, properties and applications of important industrial polymers

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Chemistry’ by Jain P.C. and Monika Jain, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
(P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2015
2. Engineering Chemistry by S.S.Dara, S.Chand & Co.Ltd,New Delhi ,2011

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradeep- NANO: The Essentials: Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,
McGraw Hill Education; 2017(1st edition)
2. Gurdeep Raj, Phase Rule, GOEL Publishing House, Meerut, 2011.
3. R. Gopalan, K. Rangarajan, P.S. Subramanian. “Elements of Analytical Chemistry”
Sultan Chand & Sons,2003.
4. F.W. Billmayer, Textbook of Polymer Science, 3rd Edison, Wiley. N.Y. 1991.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

PROBLEM SOLVING AND
UGE2176 PROGRAMMING IN PYTHON 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
• To learn algorithmic problem solving techniques.
• To learn the fundamentals of python programming.
• To compose programs in Python using conditions, iterations and decompose a
problem into functions
• To construct programs in Python sequenced data type.
• To develop python programs using advanced constructs like dictionaries and files.

UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Logical and Algorithmic Thinking: Logical Thinking – Algorithmic Thinking; Problem
Solving and Decomposition: Defining the Problem – Devising the Solution – Decomposition;
Effective building blocks: Basic Algorithmic Constructs (pseudo code, flow chart,
programming language) – Program State.

UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSION, STATEMENT, CONDITIONAL 9

Data and types: int, float, boolean, string, list; variables, expressions, statements, simultaneous
assignment, precedence of operators; comments; in-built modules and functions; Conditional:
boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), case analysis (if-elif-else).

UNIT III ITERATION, FUNCTION, STRINGS 9

Iteration: while, for, break, continue, pass; Functions: function definition, function call, flow
of execution, parameters and arguments, return values, local and global scope, recursion;
Strings: string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters, nested lists, list comprehension; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value, tuple
operations.

UNIT V DICTIONARIES, FILES 9

Dictionaries: operations and methods, looping and dictionaries, reverse lookup, dictionaries and
lists; Files: Text files, reading and writing files, format operator, file names and paths; command
line arguments.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Solve programming problems and express solutions in pseudo code.
CO2: Develop simple programs using basic constructs.
CO3: Construct programs using conditions and iterations decompose a problem into
functions.
CO4: Make use of strings, lists, tuples and dictionaries data structures.
CO5: Perform Input/Output Operations using files.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Karl Beecher, ``Computational Thinking – A beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming'', British Computer Society (BCS), 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist'', 2nd edition,
Green Tea Press, Shroff/O'Reilly Publishers, 2015 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John V Guttag, ``Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python'', 3rd
edition, MIT Press, 2021.
2. Ashok Namdev Kamthane, Amit Ashok Kamthane, ``Programming and Problem Solving
with Python'', McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2018.
3. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, ``Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach'', Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.
4. Timothy A. Budd, ``Exploring Python'', Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,
2015.
5. Kenneth A. Lambert, ``Fundamentals of Python: First Programs'', 2nd Edition,
CENGAGE Learning, 2018.

0
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 1

CO2 2 2
CO3 2 3 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UGE2177 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 1 0 4 3

OBJECTIVES
• To develop the graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
engineering products.
• To expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings

Concepts and Conventions (Not for Examinations):

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS

conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREE HAND SKETCHING 10

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics –Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Drawing of tangents and normal to
the above curves. Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –
Representation of Three-Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of
multiple views from pictorial views of objects.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 15

Orthographic projection principles - Principal planes - First angle projection - Layout of views
- Projection of points. Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both
the principal planes - Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method
and traces. Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal
planes by rotating object method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 15
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when
the axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 20

Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the
one of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of truncated solids (simple position only) – Prisms, pyramids,
cylinders and cones.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 15

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions. Perspective projection of simple solids- Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method.
TOTAL PERIODS: 75

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Draw Plane curves and perform Free hand sketching of three - dimensional objects.
CO2: Draw the Orthographic projections of points, lines and plane surfaces.
CO3: Draw the Projections of solids.
CO4: Draw the Projections of sectioned solids and Development of surfaces.
CO5: Draw the Isometric and Perspective projections of solids.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natarajan, K.V., A Text book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai, 33rd Edition, 2020.
2. Venugopal, K. and Prabhu Raja, V., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P)
Limited, 15th Edition, 2018.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bhatt, N.D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House, 53rd Edition, 2014.
2. Basant Agarwal, and Agarwal, C.M., Engineering Drawing, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition,
2019.
3. Gopalakrishna, K.R., Engineering Drawing (Vol. I & II Combined), Subhas Publications,
27th Edition, 2017.
4. Luzzader J Warren, and Jon M Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Pearson
Education, 11th Edition, 2005.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
 4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 2 3

CO3 3 2 2 2 3

CO4 3 2 2 2 3

CO5 3 2 2 2 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UGE2197 PROGRAMMING IN PYTHON LAB 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES

• To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.

• To apply conditions and loops to solve problems using python.
• To implement programs using functions
• To write programs using different data types such as strings, lists tuples and dictionaries
• To perform read and write operations into the files.

SUGGESTIVE EXERCISES
1. Use Linux shell commands, use Python in interactive mode, and an editor
2. Write simple programs (area of a geometric shape, simple interest, solve quadratic
equation, net salary).
3. Write programs using conditional statements (leap year, maximum of 2 numbers,
maximum of 3 numbers, simple calculator, grade of the total mark).
4. Develop programs using loops and nested loops (gcd, prime number, integer division,
sum of digits of an integer, multiplication table, sum of a series, print patterns, square root
using Newton's method).
5. Develop programs using functions (sine and cosine series, Pythagorean triplets).
6. Develop programs using recursion (efficient power of a number, factorial, Fibonacci
number).
7. Develop programs using strings (palindrome, finding substring) without using in-built
functions.
8. Develop programs using lists and tuples (linear search, binary search, selection sort,
insertion sort, quicksort).
 9. Develop programs using nested lists (matrix manipulations).
10. Develop simple programs using dictionaries (frequency histogram, nested dictionary).
11. Develop programs using Files (read and write files).
12. Develop programs to perform any task by reading arguments from command line.
13. Implement a simple application using appropriate datatypes and files

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Write, test, and debug simple Python programs
CO2: Build Python programs with conditionals and loops
CO3: Solve a problem using functions in python programming
CO4: Construct python programs using compound data like lists, tuples, and dictionaries
CO5: Build a simple application in teams using files and appropriate datatypes by
applying the best programming practices

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 1

CO2 3 3 1 1

CO3 3 3 1 1

CO4 3 3 1 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UGS2197 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PHYSICS LABORATORY
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of this course is to enable the students to
● Obtain basic Knowledge about physics concepts applied in optics, thermal physics
and properties of matter.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(A minimum of 5 experiments to be performed from the given list)

1. Determination of the Young’s modulus of the material of the given beam

 by Non-uniform bending method.
2. Determination of the rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire using
torsion pendulum.
3. Determination of the wavelength of the mercury spectra using Spectrometer and
grating.
4. Determination of the dispersive power of a prism using Spectrometer.
5. Determination of the grating element/wavelength, and particle size/ wavelength using a
laser.
6. Determination of the Numerical and the acceptance angle of an optical fiber.
7. Determination of the thickness of a thin wire using interference fringes.
8. Determination of the coefficient of viscosity of the given liquid using Poiseuille’s
method.
9. Determination of the band gap energy of a semiconductor.
10. Determination of the coefficient of thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor
using Lee’s disc.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Apply principles of elasticity, optics, viscosity, thermal and band gap
determination for engineering applications
CO-PO/PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 1

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

OBJECTIVES

• To impart hands on training for all the possible concepts learned in Engineering
Chemistry Course

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any 6 to be performed)
1. Estimation of ferrous ion by potentiometric titration
2. Estimation of strong acid using pH meter.
3. Estimation of strong acid by conductometric titration
4. Estimation of mixture of strong and weak acids using conductometer
5. Estimation of BaCl2 by conductometric titration
6. Determination of degree of polymerization of a water soluble polymer by Viscosity
method
7. Determination of equivalent conductance of a strong electrolyte at infinite dilution
8. Determination of weak acid using weak base by conductometric titration.
9. Determination of rate of corrosion by weight loss method

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

COURSE OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
 CO1: Analyse ions like Fe2+, Fe3+ ,H+ using different instruments
CO2: Determine the Molecular weight and Degree of Polymerisation using viscometer

TEXT BOOK

Manual Prepared by Faculty of Chemistry Department, SSNCE

REFERENCE BOOK

1. Practical Physical Chemistry,B.Viswanath and P.S.Raghavan, ViVa Books

PVT.Ltd,New Delhi, 2012.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3

CO2 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

COMPLEX FUNCTIONS AND LAPLACE
UMA2276 3 1 0 4
TRANSFORMS

OBJECTIVES
The objective of this course is to enable the student to
• Applying C-R equations in the construction of Analytic Functions.
• Study the methods of Complex Integration, finding Taylor’s and Laurent’s Series
expansions.
• Find the Laplace Transforms and inverse transforms for standard functions.
• Solve Differential Equations using different techniques.
• Evaluate Line, Surface and Volume integrals.

UNIT I ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12

Analytic functions – necessary and sufficient conditions, Cauchy-Riemann equations in Cartesian
and polar form (with proof) – Properties - harmonic functions, Construction of analytic function,
ଵ
conformal mapping - some standard transformations – ‫ ݖ = ݓ‬+ ܿ, ܿ‫ݖ‬, ௭ , ‫ ݖ‬ଶ , bilinear
transformation.
UNIT II COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula, Taylor’s and Laurent’s
series, Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour (except the poles
on the real axis).
UNIT III LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12
Definition, properties, existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of
unit step function and unit impulse function, shifting theorems, Transforms of derivatives and
integrals, Initial and final value theorems, Periodic functions, Inverse transforms – Convolution
theorem.
UNIT IV ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Solution of second and higher order linear differential equation with constant coefficients
(݂ሺ‫ݔ‬ሻ = ݁ ௠௫ , ‫ݔ݉݊݅ݏ‬, ܿ‫ݔ݉ݏ݋‬, ‫ ݔ‬௡ , ݂ሺ‫ݔ‬ሻ݁ ௠௫ , ݂ሺ‫ݔ‬ሻ‫)ݔ݉݊݅ݏ‬, Method of variation of parameters,
Simultaneous linear equations with constant coefficients of first order, Solving linear second
order ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transforms.
UNIT V VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl – Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields, Line integral over a plane curve, Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface, Volume integral, Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Solve problems in Analytic functions and construction of analytic functions using C-
R equations.
CO2: Solve problems using integration techniques, find Taylor’s and Laurent’s Series
expansions.
CO3: Obtain the Laplace Transforms and inverse transforms of standard functions.
CO4: Solve Differential Equations using different techniques.
CO5: Evaluate Line, Surface and Volume integrals.
CO6: Application of Complex integration, Laplace transforms, Ordinary differential
equations, and vector calculus in engineering problems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition, 2018.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 10th
Edition, 2016.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bali, N.P., Goyal, M., Watkins, C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Limited, 2007.
2. Boyce, W.E., and DiPrima, R.C., Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value
Problems, 11th Edition, Global Edition, Wiley, 2017.
3. George B. Thomas Jr., Maurice D. Weir, Joel R. Hass, Thomas' Calculus: Early
Transcendental, 13th Edition, Pearson Education, 2014.
4. O’Neil. P. V., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Howard Anton, Irl C. Bivens, Stephen Davis, Calculus Early Transcendentals, 11th
Edition, Global Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2017.
 6. Srimanta Pal and Subodh C. Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University Press,
2015.
7. Srivastava, A.C., and Srivastava, P.K., Engineering Mathematics Volume I and II, PHI
learning Pvt. Ltd, 2011.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1

CO2 3 2 1

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 1

CO5 3 2 1

CO6 3 2 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

BASIC ELECTRICAL AND

UEE2251 3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

PREAMBLE

It helps in understanding the importance of machines in electrical applications. This course helps
in providing adequate knowledge about the different machines governing the basic electrical
operations. In addition, this course helps in understanding the basics of three phase circuits and
power systems. Finally, this course helps the students in selecting a specific instrument for a
particular application by studying the basics of measurement and instrumentation.
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on

• Operation of Three phase electrical circuits and power measurement

• Working principles of Electrical Machines (Both AC and DC)
• Working principle of various measuring instruments.

UNIT I AC CIRCUITS AND POWER SYSTEMS 9

Three phase power supply – Star connection – Delta connection – Balanced and Unbalanced
Loads- Power equation – Star Delta Conversion – Three Phase Power Measurement -
Transmission & Distribution of electrical energy – Overhead Vs Underground system –
Protection of power system – types of tariff – power factor improvement.
UNIT II TRANSFORMER 9
Introduction - Ideal Transformer – Accounting for Finite Permeability and Core Loss – Circuit
Model of Transformer – Per Unit System – Determination of Parameters of Circuit Model of
Transformer – Voltage Regulation – Name Plate Rating – Efficiency – Three Phase
Transformers - Auto Transformers.
UNIT III DC MACHINES 9
Introduction – Constructional Features– Motoring and generation principle – EMF and Torque
equation - Circuit Model – Methods of Excitation and magnetisation characteristics – Starting
and Speed Control – Universal Motor.
UNIT IV AC MACHINES 9
Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors – Construction –Types – Equivalent
circuit. Single phase Induction motors - Construction and Working – Types–starting and speed
control methods. Alternator- working principle– EMF equation. Synchronous motors- working
principle-starting methods – Torque equation – Stepper Motors – Brushless DC Motors.
UNIT V MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION 9
Type of Electrical and electronic instruments – Classification- Types of indicating Instruments –
Principles of Electrical Instruments – Multimeters, Oscilloscopes - Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Measurement – Errors in Measurement – Transducers - Classification of
Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall
effect and Mechanical.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basic concept of three phase supply
CO2: Understand the basics of power generation, transmission and distribution
CO3: Comprehend the concepts in AC and DC motors, generators and transformers
CO4: Understand the operation and working of special machines
CO5: Choose appropriate measuring instruments for given application

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothari D.P and Nagarath, I.J, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Private Limited, Third Reprint, 2016.
2. Giorgio Rizzoni, Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2010.
3. S. Salivahanan, R. Rengaraj and G.R. Venkatakrishnan, " Basic Electrical and
Instrumentation Engineering" , McGraw Hill, 2017.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya S.K, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Pearson India, 2011.
2. Del Toro, Electrical Engineering Fundamentals, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.
3. Leonard S Bobrow, Foundations of Electrical Engineering, Oxford University Press,2013.
4. Rajendra Prasad, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
5. Mittle, N, Basic Electrical Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 24th Reprint, 2016.
 6. Fitzgerald A.E, David E Higginbotham, and Arvin Grabel, Basic Electrical Engineering,
McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2009.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 1

CO2 3 2 1 2 1

CO3 3 2 1 2 1

CO4 3 2 1 2 1

CO5 3 2 2 2 1

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P EL C
CODE

FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC
UEC2201 3 0 1 3 4.5
DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

PREAMBLE
Fundamentals of Electronic Devices and Circuits is a foundation course on the development of
electronic devices and circuits. This course provides a broad overview on the working of various
PN devices and the students will have a hands-on experience in designing simple electronic
devices using discrete PN devices. Moreover, this course provides a broad overview on the design
and development of BJT and FET based amplifier circuits.

OBJECTIVES
● To acquaint the semiconductor properties and formation of PN Junction diode and its
characteristics
● To understand the operation and applications of BJT, FET and special PN devices
● To understand the concepts of biasing in BJT, JFET and MOSFET
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits using equivalent
circuit.
● To provide exposure to the students with hands-on experience on various basic
electronic devices.

UNIT I PN JUNCTION DIODE AND BJT CHARACTERISTICS 9

Theory of PN junction diode – Energy band structure of open-circuited PN junction – Diode
current equation – Temperature dependence of V-I characteristics of diode - Transition and
diffusion capacitances - Breakdown in PN junction diodes – Switching Characteristics of diode.
BJT: Construction of BJT – Operation of NPN and PNP transistors – Types of configurations –
Breakdown in Transistors

UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR AND SPECIAL PN DEVICES 9

Construction and operation of N-channel JFET – Characteristic parameters of JFET (drain
resistance, transconductance, amplification factor) – Expression for saturation drain current -
Construction and operation of N-Channel and P-Channel MOSFET – Enhancement and depletion
type MOSFET –Characteristics – Threshold voltage – Channel length modulation - Operation
and I-V Characteristics of Zener diode – Varactor diode – Photodiode - Operation and I-V
Characteristics of UJT – SCR – DIAC.

UNIT III BIASING OF DISCRETE BJT, JFET & MOSFET 9

BJT: Need for biasing - DC load line and bias point - Thermal runaway - Stability factor (S) -
Design and analysis of transistor biasing circuits – fixed bias -feedback bias – self bias circuits -
JFET: DC load line and bias point - Methods of JFET and MOSFET biasing.

UNIT IV BJT AND FET SINGLE-STAGE AMPLIFIERS 9

General shape of frequency response of amplifiers - Frequency response of transistor amplifiers
with circuit capacitors - Small signal hybrid-π equivalent circuit of BJT - Early effect – Mid-band
analysis of CE, CC and CB amplifiers using hybrid-π equivalent circuit - Small signal hybrid-π
equivalent circuit of FET and MOSFET – Mid-band analysis of CS, CD and CG amplifiers using
hybrid-π equivalent circuit.

UNIT V MULTI-STAGE AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Different coupling schemes used in Amplifiers - Bootstrapping technique - Darlington amplifier
- Cascade and cascode amplifier using BJT - BJT Differential amplifier - Small signal analysis
and CMRR - FET differential amplifier - Small signal analysis and CMRR.
Theory Periods: 45
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (any 2)
1. Design an automatic water level indicator and a motor control using bipolar junction
transistors.
2. Construct a mobile charging unit using silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR).
3. Using an LDR and relay circuit, construct an automatic street light controller.
4. Design and develop an alarm security system using BJT.
5. Design a fire alarm system using LDR.
6. Construct a LED flash circuit using UJT
7. Design a battery eliminator circuit using Zener diodes.
8. Design a pulse generator using UJT.
9. Design a shadow movement alarm using photodiodes.
10. Design an infrared Alarm system to detect movement of people using photodiodes.
11. Design a RF filter using a variable capacitor.
12. Design a power supply for amplifier circuit.
 TOTAL PERIODS: 60

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1 : Explain the basics of device physics and working principle of PN Junction diode
CO2 : Describe the construction, operation and applications of BJT, FET and special PN
devices.
CO3 : Apply the knowledge of biasing on BJT and FET circuits
CO4 : Analyze the performance of small-signal BJT and FET in single stage and multi-stage
amplifiers.
CO5 : Design and evaluate electronic systems using semiconductor devices and analyze its
characteristics.
CO6 : Communicate effectively through reflections, reports and presentations

TEXT BOOK:
1. Salivahanan S and Suresh Kumar N, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill
Education, Fourth Edition, 2017. (Unit I to V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuits Analysis and Design, McGraw Hill Education
(India) Private Ltd., Third Edition, 2017.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory,
Pearson Education, Eleventh Edition, 2016.
3. Millman J, Halkias C and Sathyabrada Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Ltd., Fourth Edition, 2015.
4. Thomas L. Floyd, Electronic Devices, Pearson Education, Ninth Edition, 2017.
5. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Oxford University Press, Fifth Edition,
2017.
CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1 2 1 2 3

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO6 3 3 3 3 2 1 1
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UCY2276 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 3 0 0 0

OBJECTIVES
• The students of Engineering undergoing this Course would develop a better
understanding of human relationships, perceptions and policies towards the environment
and focus on design and technology for improving environmental quality

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEM AND BIODIVERSITY 9

Definition, scope and importance of environment– concept, structure and function of an
ecosystem – energy flow- food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – ecological
succession Introduction to biodiversity definition and types– values of biodiversity- India as a
mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity-endangered and
endemic species of India -conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity.
UNIT II NATURAL RESOURCES 9
Uses, over-exploitation of natural resources: Forest, Water, Mineral, Food, Energy and Land.
Case studies on over exploitation of natural resources -Role of an individual in conservation of
natural resources- Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.
UNIT III CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES 9
Environmental issues– causes, effects and control measures of Pollution of (a) Air (Smog, acid
rain, climate change and global warming, ozone layer depletion) (b) Water (rain water harvesting,
watershed management and waste water treatment) (c) Soil (solid waste management, wasteland
reclamation) (d)Electronic waste.
Population explosion, Resettlement and rehabilitation of people and Disaster management.
UNIT IV ENGINEERING INTERVENTIONS TO REDUCE ENVIRONMENTAL
STRESSES 9
Role of information technology in environment- Remote Sensing- satellites and sensors-
Geographical Information Systems(GIS)-Applications. Environment data base management
system.
Green chemistry-Principles - Green buildings-Advantages of green buildings over conventional
buildings-Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV)
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9
Environmental Ethics for sustainable development- Human rights- Environmental Impact
Assessment– Ecomark-role of NGO- Central and state pollution control boards- Air (Prevention
and Control of Pollution) act 1981– Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act 1974–
Wildlife protection act 1972 – Forest conservation act 1980- The National Green Tribunal Act
2010

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: The structure and functions of the ecosystems and diversity among life forms within
an ecosystem
CO2: The importance of various natural resources and its sustainable use
CO3: The various environmental issues such as pollution, population explosion etc and
suggest remedial measures.
CO4: The role of engineering techniques to minimize environmental stress
CO5: The role of various environmental machineries and to ensure proper environmental
regulation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik, Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age
International Publishers,14thEdition, 2014.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi,2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd

edition,Pearson Education, 2004.
2. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning
India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 1

CO2 3 2 1

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 1

CO5 3
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2202 CIRCUIT AND NETWORK ANALYSIS 3 1 0 4

PREAMBLE
The analysis of the circuits is the basic foundation to understand all electrical phenomena.
Circuit and network analysis is connected with technologies that involves electricity, such as
medical, automotive, computer, energy and aerospace industries. In this course, the fundamental
laws governing the circuits are studied by developing the mathematical representation and the
analysis of the circuits.

OBJECTIVES
● To learn the basic concepts and behaviour of DC and AC circuits.
● To understand various methods of circuit/ network analysis using network theorems.
● To learn the concept of resonance and coupling in tuned circuits.
● To understand the transient and steady state response of the circuits subjected to DC
excitations and AC with sinusoidal excitations.
● To characterize two port networks in terms of Z, Y, ABCD and h parameters.

UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 12

Ohm’s law – Kirchhoff’s laws – DC and AC Circuits – Resistors, inductors and capacitors in
series and parallel circuits – voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta
conversion – Mesh current and node voltage method of analysis for DC and AC circuits – Phasor
Diagram
.

UNIT II NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 12

Superposition theorem – Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems – Maximum power transfer theorem
– Reciprocity theorem.

UNIT III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 12

Resonance – Series and Parallel resonance – frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth
– Self and Mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Dot convention – Modeling of coupled
circuits – Coupled inductors in series and parallel – Tuned circuits – Single tuned and Double
tuned coupled circuits.

UNIT IV TRANSIENT ANALYSIS 12

Natural and Forced Response, Damping, damping coefficient, Transient response of RL, RC and
RLC circuits using Laplace transform for DC excitations and AC with sinusoidal excitations

UNIT V TWO PORT NETWORKS 12

Two port networks, Characterization of two port networks in terms of Z, Y, ABCD and h-
parameters, Representation of one parameter in terms of other, Interconnection of two port
networks – Symmetry and Reciprocity.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Apply the basic concepts of circuit analysis such as Kirchoff’s laws, mesh current and
node voltage method for analysis of DC and AC circuits.
CO2: Apply the basic circuit analysis concepts and network theorems such as, Superposition
theorem, Thevenin’s theorem, Norton’s theorem, Reciprocity theorem, and Maximum
power transfer theorem to DC and AC circuits.
CO3: Analyze the frequency response of parallel and series resonance circuits, the concept of
inductance, coupling and apply it to single and double tuned circuits.
CO4: Analyse transient response for any RC, RL and RLC circuits.
CO5: Analyze two port networks in terms of Z, Y, ABCD and h parameters.

TEXT BOOK:
1. William H. Hayt Jr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits
Analysis”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Eighth Edition, 11th Reprint 2016. (Unit I to
V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahvi, Electric circuits, Schaum’s outline series, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 6th edition, 2016.
2. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, McGraw
Hill, 6th edition, 2017.
3. J. David Irwin, R. Mark Nelms, Basic Engineering Circuit Analysis, John Wiley & Sons,
11th edition, 2015.
4. S. Salivahanan, “Circuit Theory: Analysis and Synthesis”, Pearson Education, First
edition, 2021.
5. Bruce A. Carlson, Circuits, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2008.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
CO3 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
CO5 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1
 Course Course Title L T P C
Code
DESIGN THINKING AND ENGINEERING
UGE2297 0 0 3 1.5
PRACTICES LAB
Objectives:
• To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic
engineering practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering
• To train the students to dismantle, understand the functional / aesthetic aspects of
the product, prepare the part functional model, and to assemble the different
engineering components
List of Experiments:

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE)

I - CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings -
Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings,
unions, reducers, and elbows in household fittings.
(b) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(c) Hands-on-exercise:
• Basic pipe connections - Mixed pipe material connection - Pipe
connections with different joining components.
• Plumbing with basic connections for washing basin and sink
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
• Fabrication of different models of pencil box and pen stand.
• Fabrication of wooden wall shelf
(c) Demonstration of wood working machinery
II - MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
Basic Machining:
(a) Drilling Practice (holes of various diameters - steel sheet metal, wood,
hylam/plywood sheet)
Sheet Metal Work
(a) Forming & Bending
(b) Different type of joints.
• Fabrication of mobile phone metal stand
• Fabrication of electrical control panel box
Design thinking practices
To dismantle, understand the functional / aesthetic aspects of the product, prepare the part
functional model, and to assemble the following components.
• Pedestal Fan head swing mechanism - Reserve mechanism (Two wheeler) - Hot
Glue gun - Paper clips - Flush tank container mechanism - Hand pump – washer
Mechanism
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE)
 1. Residential house wiring, staircase wiring and tube light wiring with single phase AC
two wire system.
2. Energy measurement with RLC Load.
3. Earth resistance measurement.
4. Measurement of AC parameters using CRO and half wave and Full wave rectifier.
5. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR & NOT.
6. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using PCB.

Design thinking practices

1. Assemble a single phase 3 wire circuit for connecting household appliances and
explain through schematic diagram
2. Measure the energy consumed by the household appliances and verify it theoretically
3. Analyze the fault occurring in electrical appliances
4. Design, assemble and test a cell phone charger
5. Design, assemble and test a relay logic to control electrical appliances.
6. Design, assemble and test a dc power supply using PCB
Total Periods:45
Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Draw pipeline plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household
woodwork (K2)
CO2: Practice machining to make holes on different materials; fabricate sheet metal
components (K2)
CO3: Dismantle, understand the functional / aesthetic aspects of the product, prepare the part
functional model of various components (K2)
CO4: Construct domestic electrical circuits and verify their output parameters (K3)
CO5: Construct electronics circuits and verify their output (K3)

References:
1. Willis H. Wagner, Howard "Bud" Smith, and Mark W. Huth Modern Carpentry, 12th
Edition, 2015
2. P.C.Sharma, Production Technology (Manufacturing Process): Manufacturing Process,
S.Chand publisher, 2006
3. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials,
McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
4. David W Rongey , A Complete Guide to Home Electrical Wiring, 2013
5. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering
Practices Laboratory”, Anuradha Publications, (2007).

COs POs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 3 2 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1
5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2211 CIRCUITS AND DEVICES LAB 0 0 2 1

PREAMBLE
This laboratory is designed to provide hands on training for students undergoing course
on Electric Circuits and Electronic Devices. The experiments provide deeper understanding about
the theorems and working of semiconductor devices.

OBJECTIVES
• To gain hands on experience in selected network theorems
• To understand the working of resonant circuits
• To learn the VI characteristics of basic semiconductor electronic devices.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Part I: Circuit Experiments

1. Verification of Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law and Kirchhoff’s Current Law

2. Verification of Thevenin and Norton theorem
3. Verification of Superposition theorem
4. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer and Reciprocity theorem
5. Determination of Resonance Frequency of Series and Parallel RLC Circuits

Part II: Electronic Devices Experiments

1. VI Characteristics of PN Junction diode

2. Zener diode Characteristics & voltage Regulation using Zener diode
3. Input and Output Characteristics of BJT in CE configuration
4. VI Characteristics of JFET
5. VI characteristics of SCR

TOTAL PERIODS: 30

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Verify network theorems and estimate the resonant behaviour of RLC circuits.
CO2: Analyse the characteristics of basic electronic devices

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /

EXPERIMENT)
 S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity
Semiconductor devices (Diodes, BJT, FET and SCR)
1 As required
and resistors
2 Decade inductance and capacitance box 2 boxes each
3 DC Ammeter, Voltmeter and Multi-meters As required
4 Bread-boards and connecting wires As required

CO – PO/PSO MAPPING
Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2

CO2 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 3 1

COURSE TITLE L T P C
COURSE CODE
LINEAR ALGEBRA AND NUMERICAL
UMA2353 3 1 0 4
METHODS

OBJECTIVES

The objective of this course is to enable the student to

• To study the basics of vector spaces, subspaces and linear transformations

• To apply the linear transformation concepts in diagonalization of a matrix
• To study inner product and norms and apply it in Gram-Schmidt procedure and least
square approximation
• To evaluate the linear system of equations by using different numerical methods
• To find the numerical solution of Eigen values problems and generalized inverses

UNIT I VECTOR SPACES 12

Vector spaces –Subspaces –Linear combinations and system of Linear equations –Linear
independence and Linear dependence –Bases and Dimensions

UNIT II LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS 12

Linear transformations –Null and Range spaces -Matrix representation of linear transformation –
Eigen values, Eigenvectors and Diagonalization.

UNIT III INNER PRODUCT SPACES 12

Inner product and norms -Gram Schmidt orthonormalization process -Orthogonal Complement –
Least square approximation.
UNIT IV NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF LINEAR SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS 12

Solution of linear system of equations–Direct methods – Gauss elimination method, Pivoting,

Gauss-Jordan method -Cholesky decomposition method -Iterative methods – Gauss-Jacobi and
Gauss-Seidel methods.

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS AND

GENERALISED INVERSES 12

Eigen value Problems – Power method, Jacobi’s rotation method– QR decomposition,

Generalized inverse of a matrix,Singular value decomposition.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1 : Solve the problems using the concepts of vector spaces, subspaces and linear
transformation
CO2 : Apply linear transformation to diagonalize a given matrix and hence to find the eigen
values of the given matrix
CO3 : Apply Gram-Schmidt’s orthogonalization process to diagonalize a given matrix and
to solve the given system of equations by least square approximations
CO4 : Demonstrate understanding of common numerical methods and how they are used to
obtain approximate solutions to the linear system of equations
CO5 : Decompose the matrix using different methods such as QR and singular value
Decomposition
CO6 : Application of inner product space and numerical methods in engineering problems

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, 4th
Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, 7th Edition, Brooks/Cole (Thomson
Publications), New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra – A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
2. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, 4th Edition, Brooks/Cole (Thomson
Publications), New Delhi, 2006.
3. Gerald C.F, and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, 7th Edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
5. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2005.
6. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum’s outline series, McGraw Hill, 1989.
7. M. Tamban Nair and Arindama Singh, Linear Algebra, Springer, 2018.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 1
CO6 3 3 1 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

Universal Human Values 2: Understanding
UHS2376 2 0 2 3
Harmony

OBJECTIVES
• To help students distinguish between values and skills, and understand the need, basic
guidelines, content and process of value education.
• To help students initiate a process of dialogue within themselves to know what they
‘want to be in their life and profession
• To help students understand the meaning of happiness and prosperity for a human
being.
• To facilitate the students to understand harmony at all the levels of human living,
and live accordingly.
• To facilitate the students in applying the understanding of harmony in existence in
their profession and lead an ethical life Course

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VALUE EDUCATION 9

Value Education - Need, Basic Guidelines, Content and Process, Self-Exploration - meaning,
importance and process, Continuous Happiness and Prosperity - A look at basic Human
Aspirations, Right understanding, Relationship and Physical Facilities - the basic requirements,
Understanding Happiness and Prosperity - A critical appraisal of the current scenario, Method
to fulfil the above human aspirations - understanding and living in harmony at various levels.

UNIT II HARMONY IN THE HUMAN BEING 9

An understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material ‘Body’,
Understanding the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - Sukh and Suvidha, Understanding the Body
as an instrument of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer), Understanding the characteristics
and activities of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’, Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam
and Swasthya; correct appraisal of Physical needs, t h e meaning of Prosperity in detail,
Programs to ensure Sanyam and Swasthya.

UNIT III HARMONY IN THE FAMILY AND SOCIETY 9

Understanding harmony in the Family- the basic unit of human interaction, understanding
values in a human-to-human relationship; Understanding Trust - the foundational value in
relationship, Difference between intention and competence, Understanding Respect – as the
right evaluation, Difference between respect and differentiation; the other salient values in a
relationship, Understanding the harmony in the society - comprehensive Human Goals,
Visualizing a universal harmonious order in society- Undivided Society, Universal Order -
from family to world family!

UNIT IV HARMONY IN NATURE AND EXISTENCE 9

Understanding the harmony in Nature, Interconnectedness, self-regulation and mutual

fulfilment among the four orders of nature- recyclability, Understanding Existence as
Coexistence of mutually interacting units in all-pervasive space, Holistic perception of harmony
at all levels of existence.

UNIT V IMPLICATIONS OF THE ABOVE HOLISTIC UNDERSTANDING OF

HARMONY ON PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 9

Natural acceptance of human values, Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct, Basis for
Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution and Humanistic Universal Order,
Competence in Professional Ethics - augmenting universal human order, the scope and
characteristics of people-friendly and eco-friendly, Holistic Technologies, production systems
and management models - Case studies, Strategy for the transition from the present state to
Universal Human Order - At the level of individual: as socially and ecologically responsible
engineers, technologists and managers, At the level of society: as mutually enriching institutions
and organizations.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, the students will be able to

CO1: Understand the significance of value inputs in a classroom, distinguish between

values and skills, understand the need, basic guidelines, content and process of value
education, explore the meaning of happiness and prosperity and do a correct appraisal
of the current scenario in the society.
CO2: Distinguish between the Self and the Body, understand the meaning of Harmony in
the Self the Co-existence of Self and Body.
CO3: Understand the value of harmonious relationship based on trust, respect and other
naturally acceptable feelings in human-human relationships and explore their role
in ensuring a harmonious society.
CO4: Understand the harmony in nature and existence, and work out their mutually
fulfilling participation in nature.
CO5: Distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and start working out the
strategy to actualize a harmonious environment wherever they work.

TEXT BOOK:
1. R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, 2009, A Foundation Course in Human Values
and Professional Ethics, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2nd Revised Edition, 2019.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jeevan Vidya: EkParichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amarkantak, 1999.
2. Human Values, A.N. Tripathi, New Age Intl. Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
3. The Story of Stuff (Book).
4. The Story of My Experiments with Truth - by Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi
5. Small is Beautiful - E. F Schumacher.
6. Slow is Beautiful - Cecile Andrews
7. The economy of Permanence - J C Kumarappa
8. Bharat Mein Angreji Raj - PanditSunderlal
9. Rediscovering India - by Dharampal
10. Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule - by Mohandas K. Gandhi
11. India Wins Freedom - Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad
12. Vivekananda - Romain Rolland (English)
13. Gandhi - Romain Rolland (English)

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 3 2 3

CO2 2 3 3 2 3

CO3 2 3 3 2 3

CO4 2 3 3 2 3

CO5 2 3 3 2 3
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2301 ANALOG CIRCUITS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Analog Circuits is the fundamental course offered to discuss the construction and working
of various amplifier topologies and signal generators using transistors. Also, this course provides
the foundation for integrated circuits, the associated basic building blocks and the linear/non-
linear electronic applications using OPAMP. Using this knowledge, the students can construct
circuits for use in a variety of applications such as communication systems.

OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the concept of feedback amplifiers and power amplifiers
● To study the construction and operation of transistor-based waveform generators
● To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits
● To learn the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers
● To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and some special function ICs

UNIT I TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIERS 9

Classification of amplifiers - Concept of feedback in amplifiers - General Characteristics of
feedback - Analysis of feedback amplifiers - Power Amplifiers: Class A, Class B, Class C, Class
AB Amplifiers.

UNIT II TRANSISTOR SIGNAL GENERATORS 9

Basic principles of sinusoidal oscillators - RC phase shift oscillator, Wien Bridge Oscillator -
Hartley, Colpitts and Clapp Oscillators - Crystal Oscillators - Multivibrators: Bistable,
Monostable and Astable multivibrators.

UNIT III BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Current mirror and current sources - Voltage sources - Voltage References - Basic information
about op-amps - Ideal Operational Amplifier - General operational amplifier stages of IC 741 -
DC and AC performance characteristics - slew rate - Open and closed loop configurations.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Sign Changer - Scale Changer - Phase Shift Circuits - Voltage Follower - V-to-I and I-to-V
converters - Adder - subtractor - Instrumentation amplifier - Integrator, Differentiator -
Logarithmic amplifier, Antilogarithmic amplifier – Comparators - Schmitt trigger - Precision
rectifier - peak detector - clippers and clampers - Low-pass, high-pass and band-pass Butterworth
filters.

UNIT V WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs 9

Sine wave generators - Multivibrators and Triangular wave generator - Sawtooth wave generator
- ICL8038 function generator - Timer IC 555 - IC Voltage regulators - Three terminal fixed and
adjustable voltage regulators - IC 723 general purpose regulator - Frequency to Voltage and
Voltage to Frequency converters.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Classify feedback amplifiers and power amplifiers.
CO2: Design transistor based sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal signal generators.
CO3: Implement linear and nonlinear applications using OP-AMPS
CO4: Demonstrate waveform generation using OP-AMP Circuits

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Oxford University Press,
Seventh Edition, 2016. (Unit I & II)
2. D.Roy Choudhry and Shail Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., Fifth Edition, 2018. (Unit III to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Millman J, Halkias C and Chetan D. Parikh, Integrated Electronics, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory Pearson
Education, Eleventh Edition, 2016.
3. Sergio Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits, Tata
McGraw Hill, Fourth Edition 2016.
4. Salivahanan S and Kanchana Bhaskaran V S, Linear Integrated Circuits, Tata McGraw
Hill, Second Edition, 4th Reprint, 2016.
5. William D. Stanley, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson
Education, Fourth Edition, 2001.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

 UEC2302 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN 3 0 2 4

PREAMBLE:
The digital system design is the basic foundation to understand the building blocks
involved in designing any digital system. Digital systems find its applications in various areas
such as Communication, Business transactions, Traffic control, Space guidance, Medical
treatment, Weather monitoring, Internet, and many other commercial, industrial, and scientific
enterprises. In this course, the functioning of basic building blocks for digital systems are studied
and designed.

OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the important basic parameters and theoretical aspects of Boolean algebra
● To design combinational & sequential logic circuits and verify its functionality using VHDL

UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9

Analog versus Digital, Fan-In, Fan-Out, propagation delay, power dissipation, Noise Margin,
Number systems: Binary, Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal, Number-Base Conversions,
Complements of Number, Binary Codes, Boolean Algebra: Switching algebra, axioms and
theorems, Logic gates: AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EXOR, EXNOR, Canonical and Standard
Forms.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Logic minimization using Karnaugh’s map: 3 variables, 4 variables and 5 variables, Logic
minimization using Quine Mc-Cluskey method, Arithmetic operations: Half adder, full adder,
ripple carry adder, lookahead adder, subtractor, binary multiplier, Selection logic: Multiplexer,
De-multiplexer, decoder, encoder, priority encoder, magnitude comparator.

UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Latches and Flip flops: SR, JK, T and D, excitation tables and excitation equations, Counters:
Ripple counters, ring counters, modulo counters, Shift registers: SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO,
Universal shift registers, Analysis of clocked sequential circuits, Synchronous FSM: Mealy and
Moore Models, Design procedure, Design of sequence detector, counters.

UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Asynchronous FSM: Analysis Procedure, Circuit with Latches, cycles and race conditions,
Design procedure, Reduction of Flow tables, Race free assignment, Hazards, Design examples.

UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTIVE LANGUAGE: VHDL 9

Introduction to VHDL, Design entry in VHDL: Entity, architecture, coding style (behavioral and
structural), Coding syntax: sequential statement, case, if statement, sensitivity list, Behavioral
design of combinational logic blocks: multibit adder, selection logic, encoder, decoder,
comparator, Behavioral design of sequential logic blocks: counters, shift registers, finite state
machines and sequence detector, Introduction to test bench.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30
 1. Design and implement an arithmetic unit which does atleast two operations using
combinational logic.
2. Design and implement combinational logic circuits that compare two numbers.
3. Design and implement an adder which adds two numbers of any lengths with minimal
components.
4. Design and implement a sequential circuit to detect the given sequence.
5. Design a 3-bit counter which counts in ascending order when mode control input is zero
and in gray code sequence otherwise.
6. Design and implement a finite string recognizer which has one input (X) and one output
(Z). The output is asserted whenever the input sequence …010… has been observed, as
long as the sequence 100 has never been seen.
7. Design and implement a BCD to Excess-3 code converter.
8. Design and implement a traffic light controller.
9. Design and implement a digital combinational lock.
10. Design and implement a vending machine

Note: Students have to do four experiments by choosing one from 1 to 3; two from 4 to 7 and
one from 8 to 10. Students should not repeat the same set of experiments in the coming years

TOTAL PERIODS: 75
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Apply the knowledge of Boolean algebra and simplification of Boolean expressions
to deduce the digital circuits
CO2: Design combinatorial logic circuits including arithmetic logic, selection logic and
code conversion
CO3: Design synchronous and asynchronous sequential logic circuits
CO4: Design combinational and sequential logic circuits using VHDL
CO5: Evaluate relevance and use of engineering fundamentals in digital system design to
advanced industrial/societal applications or products
CO6: Communicate effectively through reflections, reports and presentations

TEXT BOOK:
1. M.Morris Mano and Michael D.Ciletti, Digital Design Pearson, 6th Edition, 2018. (Unit I
to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Salivahanan S and Arivazhagan S, Digital Circuits and Design, Oxford University Press,
Fifth Edition, 2017.
2. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Prentice Hall, Fourth Edition,
2012.
3. Charles H. Roth and Larry L. Kenney Fundamentals of Logic Design, Cengage learning,
Seventh Edition, 2018.
4. Donald D. Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2003.
5. Kenneth L. Short, VHDL for Engineers, Prentice Hall, 2009.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

 Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
CO6 3 3 1 2 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2304 OOPS AND DATA STRUCTURES 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES
• To understand the object oriented programming concepts, using C++.
• To apply object oriented programming principles in data structures.
• To use linear and non-linear data structures in various applications

UNIT I BASICS 8
Getting Started: Simple C++ program – Input/Output; Variables and Basic Types: Primitive built-
in types – Variables – Compound types; Expressions: arithmetic – logical and relational –
Assignment – Increment and decrement operators; Statements: Conditional – Iterative – Jump;
Strings, Vectors and Arrays: Library string type – Library vector type – Iterators – Arrays.

UNIT II OOP CONCEPTS 11

Functions: Basics – Argument passing – Return types and return statements – Overloaded
functions; Classes: Defining abstract data types – Access control and encapsulation –
Constructors – Static class members; Exception handling; Overloaded Operations: Arithmetic
and relational operators; Object Oriented Programming: Defining base and derived classes –
Access control and inheritance.

UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9

List ADT: Array implementation of list – Linked list – Applications: Polynomial addition; Stack
ADT: Stack model – Implementation of stacks – Applications: Postfix expressions – Infix to
postfix conversion; Queue ADT: Queue model – Array implementation of queue – Applications
of queues.

UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9

Trees: Preliminaries – Binary trees – Traversals – Binary search tree ADT; Graphs:
Definitions – Representation of graphs – Shortest-Path Algorithm: Dijkstra’s algorithm;
Minimum Spanning Tree: Prim’s algorithm.

UNIT V PRIORITY QUEUE, SORTING 8

Priority Queues: Model, Binary heap; Sorting: Insertion sort – Heapsort – Mergesort – External
sorting: Multiway merge – Polyphase merge.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Make use of the control structures of C++ in different applications.
CO2: Apply the concepts of data abstraction, encapsulation and inheritance for problem
solutions.
CO3: Select suitable linear data structures for different problem solutions.
CO4: Apply non-linear data structures to various problems.
CO5: Demonstrate the use of various sorting algorithms.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stanley B. Lippman, Jose Lajoie, and Barbara E. Moo. 2012. C++ Primer, 5th edition.
Addison-Wesley Professional.
2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2007

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Deitel and Deitel, “C++, How To Program”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Bhushan Trivedi, “Programming with ANSI C++, A Step – By - Step approach”, Oxford
University Press, 2010.
3. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
4. Herb Schildt. 2002. C++: The Complete Reference, 4th Edition (4 ed.). McGraw-Hill,
Inc., New York, NY, USA
5. Goodrich, Michael T., Roberto Tamassia, David Mount, “Data Structures and Algorithms
in C++”, 7th Edition, Wiley. 2004.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 1 2 3 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 2 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

 UEC2376 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Signals and Systems play a vital role in the many fields such as communication systems, speech
& image processing, aeronautics, biomedical systems etc., Signals are mostly continuous in
nature and can be converted to discrete. Systems respond to signals, processes them to provide
required outputs. This course provides the basic knowledge required for further processing and
analysis of signals and systems for any application.

OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and systems in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and systems in the Fourier and Z transform domain

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Continuous-Time signals (CT), Discrete-Time signals (DT) - Step, Ramp, Pulse, Real and
complex exponentials, Sinc, Impulse, Exponential, Classification of CT and DT signals - periodic
and aperiodic signals, Energy and Power signals, Random signals- Continuous-time and Discrete-
time sinusoids and its properties – Operations on signals-Dependent and Independent Variables-
CT systems and DT systems - Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant & Time-invariant, Causal &
Non-causal, Static and Dynamic and Stable & Unstable.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNAL 9

Fourier series analysis (Exponential only)- Properties of Fourier series -Time shifting, Frequency
shifting and Parseval's Theorem in Fourier series, Gibb’s phenomenon. Fourier Transform and
its properties - Linearity, Time shift, Time scaling, Frequency shift, Duality, Differentiation in
time and frequency, Convolution, Multiplication and Parseval’s Theorem. Review of Laplace
transform- Pole-Zero diagram in s-domain, Region of Convergence (ROC)- Properties of ROC-
Inverse Laplace transform.

UNIT III LINEAR TIME-INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9

Differential equation, Representing CT system using differential equations – Application of
Laplace transform to RL, RC and RLC circuits- Impulse response- Causality and Stability,
Convolution integral- Properties of convolution integral (Statement only)- Transfer function of
CT systems-Analysis of CT systems using Fourier and Laplace transform- Interconnection of
system –Cascade and Parallel.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9

Sampling of CT signals, Frequency domain representation of sampling, Reconstruction of a band-
limited signals from its samples- Z-transform, Pole – Zero diagram in z-domain, properties of Z-
transform -Linearity, Time shift, Time scaling, Time Reversal, Frequency shift, Convolution, and
Correlation, Inverse Z-transform- Partial fraction method. Discrete-Time Fourier Transform
(DTFT) and Inverse DTFT- Properties- Periodicity and Parseval’s theorem.

UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT - DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9

Difference equations, Impulse response, Convolution sum, Z-transform and DTFT Analysis of
Recursive & Non-recursive systems. Block diagram representation, Direct Form-I and Direct
Form-II - Cascade and Parallel forms, Interconnection of DT systems – Cascade and Parallel

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Analyze the properties of signals & systems.
CO2: Apply Fourier series, Laplace transform, Fourier transform, Z-transform and DTFT
in signal analysis.
CO3: Analyze continuous time LTI systems using Fourier and Laplace Transforms.
CO4: Analyze discrete time LTI systems using Z-transform and DTFT.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Oppenheim A.V, Wilsky S and Nawab S.H, Signals and Systems, Prentice-Hall
International, Second Edition, 2011 (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lathi B.P, Principles of Linear Systems and Signals, Oxford, Second Edition, 2009.
2. Zeimer R.E, Tranter W.H and Fannin R.D, Signals & Systems-Continuous and
Discrete,Prentice-Hall, Fourth Edition, 1998.
3. Oktay Alkin, Signals and Systems: A MATLAB® Integrated Approach, CRC
Press,First Edition, 2017.
4. Roberts M.J, Signals & Systems Analysis using Transform Methods & MATLAB,
Tata-McGraw Hill, First Edition, 2003.
5. Luis Chaparro and Aydin Akan, Signals and Systems using MATLAB, Elsevier,
Third.Edition, 2018

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2311 ANALOG CIRCUITS LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
Analog Circuits Lab is designed to provide hands-on experience to students to work with
electronic circuits constructed using BJT and OPAMP. The lab enables the students to apply the
knowledge and skills in analysing the electronic circuits and IC related problems using both
hardware and software.

OBJECTIVES
• To gain hands on experience in designing electronic circuits like amplifiers and
oscillators
• To apply operational amplifiers in linear and nonlinear applications
• To acquire the basic knowledge of special function ICs
• To use PSpice software for transistor and OP AMP based circuit design

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Design and analysis of Common Emitter Amplifier with and without Emitter Bypass
Capacitor
2. Design and analyse the frequency response of Common Source amplifier using JFET
3. Determination of the effect of feedback on the gain and bandwidth of Shunt-Shunt
feedback amplifier
4. Design of RC phase shift oscillator
5. Design of Hartley and Colpitts oscillator
6. Design of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifiers using Op-amp
7. Design of Integrator and Differentiator Circuits using Op-amp
8. Design of Schmitt Trigger using Op-amp.
9. Design of Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555
10. Design of Voltage Regulator circuit using LM723
11. Determination of Frequency response of Wien bridge oscillator using PSPICE
12. Design and Analysis of Instrumentation Amplifier using PSPICE
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Experiment various types of amplifiers and oscillators using BJT.
CO2: Demonstrate amplifiers and oscillators using operational amplifiers.
CO3: Implement multivibrators and voltage regulators using Ics.
CO4: Examine the performance of electronic circuits using PSpice.

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /

EXPERIMENT)
S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity
1 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (20 MHz) 15
2 Function Generators (3 MHz) 15
3 Pulse Generators 02
 4 Dual Regulated Power Supplies (0 – 30 V) 15
5 Multimeter 15
6 Transistors (BC107/BC547/BFW10) 50 each
Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors, PN-Junction diodes,
7 Zener diodes, Power transistors, Potentiometer, and As required
wires
Op-Amps: uA741, LM723, 7805, 7812, 2N3524,
8 As required
2N3525, 2N3391, AD 633, LM555, and LM565.
9 Standalone PCs with PSPICE 15
10 Breadboard As required

CO – PO & PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
OOPS AND DATA STRUCTURES
UEC2312 0 0 3 1.5
LABORATORY

OBJECTIVES

• To write programs using object oriented programming features in C++

• To implement linear and non-linear data structures
• To apply suitable data structure for various problems

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Basic programs using control structures in C++

2. Programs using arrays and vectors
3. Programs using classes
4. Programs using function & operator overloading
5. Programs using exception handling
6. Programs using inheritance
7. Linked list implementation
8. Application of Stack ADT
9. Queue ADT implementation
10. Implementation of Binary Search Tree and its traversals
 11. Implementation of Dijkstra’s algorithm
12. Implementation of Binary heaps
13. Sorting algorithms

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply object oriented programming features in program development.
CO2: Implement linked list, stack and queue.
CO3: Implement trees and graphs.
CO4: Apply suitable data structures for solving problems.

LAB EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 35 STUDENTS:

1. Standalone desktops with C++ Compiler - 35 Nos.

(or)
Server with C++ compiler supporting 35 terminals or more.

CO – PO & PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 1
CO2 1 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2401 MICROCONTROLLERS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Microcontrollers have become important building blocks in embedded system design. It is
important for student to understand the architecture of a microcontroller and its interfacing with
various modules. 8051 microcontroller architecture, programming, and interfacing is dealt in
detail in this course. Architecture, instruction set and assembly language programming of ARM
microcontroller are also covered in this course.

OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
 ● To learn the development of assembly language programming of 8051.
● To learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.
● To understand the architecture of ARM microcontroller.
● To learn the development of assembly language programming with ARM
microcontroller and interface memory.

UNIT I THE 8051 MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE 9

8051 Microcontroller Architecture – Memory organization – Register Banks- Bit addressable
area in memory - SFR – working registers - Addressing modes - Instruction set - Instruction
timing, Data transfer - Arithmetic – logic - compare - rotate instructions - Assembly language
programming.

UNIT II 8051 TIMER, SERIAL PORT and I/O PORT PROGRAMMING 9

Time delay for various 8051 chips - machine cycle - delay calculation - Timer module -
Programming 8051 timers and counters - Serial port architecture - basics of serial communication
- serial port programming - memory address decoding - Interfacing 8051 with external memory.

UNIT III 8051 INTERRUPTS AND INTERFACING 9

8051 Interrupt structure - Programming timer interrupts, external hardware interrupts, serial
communication interrupt - LCD interfacing – Keyboard Interfacing – ADC, DAC and sensor
Interfacing – Stepper Motor Interfacing - DC motor interfacing and PWM.

UNIT IV ARM MICROCONTROLLER – ARCHITECTURE 9

The Acorn RISC Machine – Architectural inheritance – The ARM Programmer’s model – ARM
development tools - Instruction set - Data transfer instructions – Data processing instructions –
control flow instructions – Assembly Language programming – 3 stage pipeline- 5 stage pipeline
– ARM Instruction execution.

UNIT V ARM MICROCONTROLLER – INTERFACING 9

Thumb bit in the CPSR – thumb programmer’s model – thumb data processing, branch, Software
interrupt instructions - ARM memory interface – Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture
(AMBA) – ARM processor cores – ARM7TDMi (LPC 2148).

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Apply programming techniques in developing the ALP for 8051 microcontrollers
CO2: Develop ALP to interface timers, serial port and I/O ports with 8051 microcontroller.
CO3: Interface different peripheral devices with 8051 microcontroller.
CO4: Comprehend the architecture of ARM microcontroller.
CO5: Apply programming techniques in developing the assembly language program for
ARM microcontroller and interface memory / peripherals

TEXT BOOK:
1 Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin McKinlay, The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C, Pearson education,
 Second Edition, 2013. (Unit I to III)
2. Steve Furber, ‘’ARM System - On - Chip architecture” Addision Wesley, 2000.
(Unit IV & V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kenneth J.Ayala, the 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, Programming and
Applications, West Publishing Company, Third Edition, 2007.
2. Scott MacKenzie, Raphael Chung-Wei Phan, the 8051 Microcontroller, Pearson
Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
3. Han-Way Huang, Using the MCS-51 Microcontroller, Oxford University Press, Firs,
Edition, 2009.
4. Joseph Yiu, the Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3, Second Edition, Newnes,
(Elsevier), 2010.
6. Raj Kamal, Microcontrollers, Pearson, Second Edition, 2012.

CO – PO & PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 2 1 3 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 1 2 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

AHS2476 INDIAN CONSTITUTION 3 0 0 0

OBJECTIVES:
● To teach history and philosophy of Indian constitution.
● To summarize powers and functions of Indian government.
● To explain structure and functions of local administration.
● To demonstrate the organization and working of the Judiciary.
● To discuss financial power and emergency provisions.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION` 9
Historical background–Government of India act – Indian councils act–Making of the
constitution - Philosophy of the Indian constitution – Preamble.

UNIT II GOVERNMENT OF THE UNION 9

Powers and Functions of President and Prime Minister - Council of Ministers–President in
relation to his council - Legislature structure and functions of Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha –
Speaker.

UNIT III GOVERNMENTS OF THE STATES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 9

The state executive: General structure – Governor – Council of ministers –State legislature.
Local government - Panchayat – Municipality – Power authority and responsibilities
municipalities.
UNIT IV THE JUDICATURE 9
Organization and Composition of Judiciary – Constitution – Appointment - Qualifications -
Powers and functions of the supreme court – High courts–Control over subordinate courts.

UNIT V THE FEDERAL SYSTEM 9

Distribution of financial powers: Need, principles - Under laying distribution of tax revenues-
Distribution of legislative power–Interstate relation-Emergency provisions.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand history and philosophy of Indian constitution
CO2: Realize powers and functions of Indian government
CO3: Acquire awareness on structure and functions of local administration
CO4: Enhance knowledge about organization and composition of judiciary
CO5: Explore the distribution of financial powers and emergency provisions

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Basu D.D, Introduction to Indian Constitution, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Gupta D.C, Indian Government and Politics, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pylee M.V, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Vikas Publishing House, New
Delhi, 2011.
2. Kashyap S, Our Constitution, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 2010.
3. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication.
4. Jain MP, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edition., Lexis Nexis,2014.
5. Busi SN, Ambedkar BR Framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015.
CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2402 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Digital signal processing is one of the fundamental and essential courses for Electronics and
Communication Engineers. Prerequisites for this course are knowledge on signals & systems, and
exposure to fundamental concepts of probability theory.
This course is focused to introduce the concepts of processing of digital deterministic signals in
general and random signals as an extended concept. Processing of deterministic signals mainly
involves filtering the signals using various frequency selective components, the design criteria,
design methodology and issues in the choice of filtering techniques. Further, as an introductory
aspect, the multirate signal processing, characteristics and applications of filters that can handle
random signals, the adaptive filters, are introduced to the students. This course is a foundation to
other elective courses such as advanced digital signal processing, Speech Processing, Image
processing, etc.

OBJECTIVES:
● To learn the fundamentals of Discrete Fourier transform and its properties.
● To understand the design aspects of frequency selective digital filters.
● To interpret the implementation issues in designing digital filters.
● To understand the concepts of adaptive filters.

UNIT I DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 9

The concept of frequency in discrete time signals. Frequency-domain sampling, the discrete
Fourier transform (DFT), DFT as a linear transformation. Properties of DFT - periodicity,
linearity, time-reversal, symmetry properties, multiplication property - circular convolution.
Linear filtering using DFT - filtering long data sequences - overlap save and overlap add method.
Computation of DFT using DIF-FFT and DIT-FFT.

UNIT II DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS 9

Ideal filter characteristics, causality and its implications, characteristics of practical frequency
selective filters. Design of FIR filters - Symmetric FIR filters, design of linear-phase FIR filters
using windows: rectangular window, Hamming window. Frequency sampling method.

UNIT III DESIGN OF IIR FILTERS 9

Design of analog filters - Chebyshev filter – Type I, Butterworth filter. Design of digital IIR low-
pass filter from analog filters - impulse invariance method and bilinear transformation.

UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION OF DISCRETE-TIME SYSTEMS 9

Structures for the realization of discrete-time systems: structures for FIR systems - direct-form,
cascade-form, Effects of quantization of FIR filter coefficients. Review of structures for IIR
systems. Round-off effects in IIR filters - limit cycle oscillations, scaling to prevent overflow.
Statistical characterization of quantization effects in realization of digital filters.

UNIT V MULTI-RATE PROCESSING & ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9

Multi-rate processing – decimation, interpolation, sampling rate conversion by rational factor
Wiener filter - Discrete Wiener Hoff equations. Basics of adaptive filters, FIR Adaptive filters,
Adaptive filters based on steepest descent method, the LMS algorithm
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Apply discrete Fourier transform for the analysis of digital signals and systems.
CO2: Design and realize a frequency selective digital IIR filters
CO3: Design and realize FIR filters
CO4: Characterize quantization effects in digital filters.
CO5: Apply, analyse and evaluate the multi-rate processing and adaptive filtering in
engineering applications

TEXT BOOK:
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, Digital signal processing - principles, algorithms
and applications, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007(Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schaffer and John R. Buck, Discrete time signal
Processing, Prentice Hall, Third Edition, 2009
2. Vinay K. Ingle and John G. Proakis, Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB,
Cengage learning, Third Edition, 2011
3. Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach, McGraw Hill,
Second Edition, 2000
4. Ashok Ambardar, Digital Signal Processing: A modern introduction, Cengage Learning
First Edition, 2006
Monson H. Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, Wiley Publishers,
2011.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

CONTROL SYSTEMS
UEE2476 3 0 0 3
ENGINEERING

PREAMBLE:
It helps in understanding the importance of transfer function models in analysing any physical
systems. This course helps in providing adequate knowledge about the control system
components. In addition, this course helps in analysing the given system both in time domain and
frequency domain. Moreover, this course introduces the stability analysis and design of
compensators technique for the given system. Finally, a state variable representation of physical
systems and its effect is introduced to analyse the multi input multi output system.

OBJECTIVES:
• To explain the importance of transfer function in modelling physical systems
• To analyse any system with respect to time domain and frequency domain
• To explain the stability of the system
• To Design and analyse a compensator system and PID Controller to meet the desired
specifications and to improve the stability of the system.

UNIT I SYSTEMS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9

Basic elements in control systems – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of
mechanical and thermal systems – Transfer function – Synchros – AC and DC servomotors –
Block diagram reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE 9

Time response – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system response
– Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – Root locus construction-
Effects of P, PI, PID modes of feedback control –Time response analysis - Implementation using
MATLAB

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE 9

Frequency response – Bode plot – Polar plot – Nyquist plot- Constant M - N circles - Nichols
Chart- Determination of closed loop response from open loop response - Correlation between
frequency domain and time domain specifications- Implementation using MATLAB

UNIT IV STABILITY AND COMPENSATOR DESIGN 9

Characteristics equation – Routh Hurwitz criterion – Performance criteria – Lag, lead and lag-
lead networks – Effect of Lag, lead and lag-lead compensation on frequency response analysis -
Design of compensator network using Bode plot.- Implementation using MATLAB

UNIT V STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state variables – State models for linear and time invariant Systems – Solution of
state and output equation in controllable canonical form – Concepts of controllability and
observability – Implementation using MATLAB

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Explain the importance of transfer function in modelling physical systems.
CO2: Analyse any system with respect to time domain.
CO3: Analyse any system with respect to frequency domain
CO4: Explain the stability of the system.
CO5: Design and analyse a compensator system to meet the desired specifications.
CO6: Design a PID controller to improve the stability of the system.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. 1. S.Salivahanan, R.Rengaraj, and G.R.Venkatakrishnan, Control systems Engineering,
Pearson India Education, 2015.
2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., Control Systems Engineering, New Age International
Publishers, 2017.
3. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Wiley, 2014

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson India Education, 2015.

2. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson India
Education,2009.
3. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and HoupisSttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
4. RamesC.Panda and T. Thyagarajan, “An Introduction to Process Modelling Identification
and Control of Engineers”, Narosa Publishing House, 2017.
5. M.Gopal, “Control System: Principle and design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
6. NPTEL Video Lecture Notes on “Control Engineering “by Prof. S. D. Agashe, IIT
Bombay.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 1

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 3

CO6 3 3 3 2 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2403 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS 3 1 0 4

PREAMBLE:
Electromagnetic fields is one of the most essential subjects for electronics and communication
engineering students. It is the study of the physical behavior of electric and magnetic fields
produced by charges and currents, the laws that govern these behaviors, and the mathematical
methods for using and applying these laws. The main topics covered are electrostatics,
magnetostatics, time-varying fields and plane waves. This course is the foundation for antenna
engineering, microwave engineering and optical communication.

OBJECTIVES:
● To understand and apply vector-analysis techniques in electromagnetics.
● To gain conceptual and basic mathematical understanding of electric and magnetic
Fields in free space and in materials.
● To understand the coupling between electric and magnetic fields through Faraday's
Law, displacement current and Maxwell's equations.
● To understand wave propagation in lossless and in lossy media.

UNIT I VECTOR ANALYSIS 12

Electromagnetic model, Units and constants, Review of vector algebra, Rectangular, cylindrical
and spherical coordinate systems, Line, surface and volume integrals, Gradient of a scalar field,
Divergence of a vector field, Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector field, Stoke's theorem, Null
identities, Helmholtz's theorem.

UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS 12
Electric field, Coulomb's law, Gauss's law and applications, Electric potential, Conductors in
static electric field, Dielectrics in static electric field, Electric flux density and dielectric constant,
Boundary conditions, Electrostatic energy, Poisson's and Laplace's equations, Capacitance of
various geometries (parallel plate, cylindrical and spherical) using Laplace's equations, Current
density and Ohm's law, Electromotive force and Kirchhoff's voltage law, Equation of continuity
and Kirchhoff's current law.

UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 12

Lorentz force equation, Law of no magnetic monopoles, Ampere's law, Vector magnetic
potential, Biot-Savart law and applications, Magnetic field intensity and relative permeability,
Magnetic circuits, Behaviour of magnetic materials, Boundary conditions, Inductance and
inductors (toroid and solenoid), Magnetic energy, Magnetic forces and torques (Hall effect,
infinitely long parallel conductors, rectangular loop)

UNIT IV TIME-VARYING FIELDS AND MAXWELL'S EQUATIONS 12

Faraday's law, Displacement current and Maxwell-Ampere law, Maxwell's equations, Potential
functions, Electromagnetic boundary conditions, Wave equations and solutions, Time-harmonic
fields.

UNIT V PLANE ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 12

Plane waves in lossless media, Plane waves in lossy media (low-loss dielectrics and good
conductors), Group velocity, Electromagnetic power flow and Poynting vector, Normal incidence
at a plane conducting boundary, Normal incidence at a plane dielectric boundary.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of fundamental electromagnetic laws
and concepts
CO2: Discuss the understanding of the effect of materials on electric and magnetic fields.
CO3: Analyze electric and magnetic field quantities from simple charge and current
Distributions
CO4: Analyze electric and magnetic field from a plane wave normally incident on a
Metallic dielectric material.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Cheng D.K., Field and wave electromagnetics, Pearson Education, Second Edition
1989. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Griffiths D.J, Introduction to Electrodynamics, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition
2013.
2. Notaros B.M, Electromagnetics, Pearson, New Jersey, 2011
3. Hayt W.H and Buck J.A, Engineering electromagnetics, McGraw-Hill (India), seventh
Edition, 2006.
4. Sadiku M.N.O and Kulkarni S.V, Principles of electromagnetics, Oxford (Asian
Edition), Sixth Edition, 2015.
5. Salivahanan S and Karthie S, Electromagnetic Field Theory, McGraw Hill Education
 Second Edition, 2018.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

PRINCIPLES OF
UEC2404 3 0 0 3
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

PREAMBLE:
Analysis and design of analog communication systems forms the basis for understanding digital,
wireless and several other personal communication systems. The signals are modulated,
transmitted through a variety of communication media and recovered at the destination. The
analysis includes the possible noise sources too. This course provides the basic knowledge
required for designing and analyzing the analog communication system in presence of noise.

OBJECTIVES:
● To introduce the concepts of analog modulation techniques and their spectral
characteristics.
● To understand the properties of random processes.
● To know the effect of noise on communication systems.
● To study the limits set by Information Theory.

UNIT I AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9

Amplitude Modulation- Double-Sideband Suppressed-Carrier AM, Conventional AM, Single-
Sideband AM, Vestigial Side-band AM – Implementation of AM Modulators and Demodulators
– Power Law Modulation, Balance Modulator, Envelope Detector, Demodulation of DSBSC,
SSB signals - Superheterodyne Receiver.

UNIT II ANGLE MODULATION 9

Angle Modulation - Representation of FM and PM signals, Spectral Characteristics of Angle
Modulated Signals - Angle Modulation by a sinusoidal signal - Angle Modulation by an arbitrary
message signal – Implementation of Angle Modulators and Demodulators - Varactor diode
modulation – Indirect generation - balanced discrimination of angle modulation.

UNIT III RANDOM PROCESS 9

Random Variables - Random Process – Basic Concepts, Statistical Averages, Wide Sense
Stationary Processes, Multiple Random Processes, Transmission of Random Process through a
Linear System, Power Spectral Density of Stationary Processes, Power Spectra in LTI Systems,
Gaussian and White Processes, Filtered Noise Processes.

UNIT IV EFFECT OF NOISE ON ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9

Effect of Transmission Losses and Noise in Analog Modulation – Characterization of Thermal
Noise Sources, Effective Noise Temperature and Noise Figure - Transmission Losses. Effect of
Noise on Amplitude Modulation Systems – Baseband System, DSB-SC AM, SSB-AM,
Conventional AM, Effect of Noise on Angle Modulation - Threshold effect, Pre-emphasis and
de-emphasis, Comparison of Analog Modulation Systems.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION THEORY 9

Modelling Information Sources, Measure of Information, Joint and Conditional Entropy, Mutual
Information, Differential Entropy, Source Coding Theorem, Source Coding Algorithms – The
Huffman Source Coding Algorithm, the Lempel-Ziv Source Coding Algorithm, Modelling of
Communication Channels – Channel Coding Theorem.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Demonstrate an understanding of Analog Modulation Principles.
CO2: Comprehend and use the concepts of Random Process to the design of Communication
system.
CO3: Analyze the noise performance the noise performance of Analog Modulation systems
CO4: Apply the concepts of source coding techniques for the design of systems

TEXT BOOK:
1. Proakis.J.G, Salehi.M, Fundamentals of Communication Systems, Pearson Education
Second edition, 2006. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Haykin.S, Communication Systems, John Wiley, Second Edition, 2005
2. Lathi B.P, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University
Press, Third Edition, 2007.
3. Roody D, Coolen.J, Electronic Communications, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2006
4. Berbard Sklar and Fredric J. Harris, Digital Communications: Fundamentals and
Applications - Prentice Hall Communications, Third Edition, Pearson, 2020.
5. Hsu.H.P, Schaum Outline Series - Analog and Digital Communications, TMH, 2006
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2 3

CO2 2 3 1 3

CO3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2411 MICROCONTROLLERS LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
Microcontrollers laboratory course helps the students to develop their knowledge on processor
architecture and the programming skills. This laboratory course provides hands-on experience to
interface I/O devices, perform A/D and D/A conversions, design traffic light etc. The skills
acquired through the experiments help the students to do their projects and enhance their
knowledge on the latest trends and technologies.

OBJECTIVES
• To introduce assembly language programming concepts and features oscillators.
• To write assembly language program for 8051.
• To interface I/O interfaces with 8051 microcontroller.
• To interface I/O interfaces with ARM (LPC2148).

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
8051 PROGRAMS USING KITS AND EDSIM51
1. Arithmetic instructions – Program to perform Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and
Division operations, program to find square and cube
2. Boolean and Logical instructions – Program to compute the logical instructions
3. Data transfer – Program for block data movement, exchange a block of data
4. Searching and sorting – sorting, exchanging, finding largest element in an array
5. Code Conversions – Program to convert HEX to Decimal number and Decimal to HEX
number
6. Programs to generate delay, Programs using serial port and on-chip timer / counters
7. Matrix Operations

8051 PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING EXPERIMENTS

1. Interfacing Stepper motor control interface.
 2. Interfacing DAC to generate waveforms of particular frequency
3. Automatic Traffic light control system using 8051

ARM (LPC2148) INTERFACING EXPERIMENTS

1. Develop an embedded C program to verify the interfacing of ADC and DAC with ARM
Microcontroller
2. Develop an embedded C program to verify the interfacing of keyboard with ARM
Microcontroller.
3. Develop an embedded C program to verify the interfacing of Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) kit with ARM microcontroller.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 : Develop and test simple assembly language programs using 8051 instruction sets
CO2 : Design and interface various peripheral devices with 8051
CO3 : Develop ALP to interface different peripherals with ARM (LPC2148)

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /

EXPERIMENT)
S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity
Interfacing Units - ADC interface, DAC interface,
1 Traffic light interface, stepper motor control interface, 3 Each
Keyboard interface
2 8051 Trainer kits 15
3 Desktop Computers with Edsim51 Simulators (8051) 15
4 ARM Trainer kit (LPC2148) 15
5 Keil µVision 15

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcom Outcomes
es PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2412 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) is one of the basic requirement in many engineering and
non-engineering fields such as communication systems, speech & image processing, artificial
intelligence and robotics, biomedical systems, medical and finance etc., This lab course is
intended to provide the basic knowledge required to record a signal in real-time and how to
analyze its frequency content to perform various signal processing operation. It also intended to
provide a practical knowledge on how to design both conventional and adaptive filters to
eliminate the background correlated and non-correlated noises.

OBJECTIVES

• To generate/record a signal in real-time and apply various signal processing algorithm

• To implement DFT and analyze the frequency content of deterministic and random
signals
• To implement FIR & IIR filters and understand the impact of finite word length effects
• To design an Adaptive filter to eliminate the correlated noise in the communication
signal

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Generate various discrete-time (DT) sequences and random noise
2. Record a signal with background noise in real-time using a microphone and perform
sectioned convolution with a Sinc function
3. Analyse the spectrum of the generated/recorded signal using DFT
4. Design a Butterworth and Chebyshev IIR filters to eliminate the background noise in the
generated/recorded signal
5. Design a Linear phase FIR filter to eliminate the background noise in the recorded signal
6. Demonstrate the impact of finite word length on the performance of FIR/IIR filters
7. Design and demonstrate an Adaptive filter to eliminate the correlated noise in the
generated/recorded signal
8. Design an N-Band Audio Equalizer and demonstrate its effects for an audio signal

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Generate/record a signal and apply various signal processing algorithm
CO2: Implement DFT/FFT to analyse the frequency spectrum of the DT signals
CO3: Design FIR/IIR filters to eliminate the background noise and analyse the impact of
finite word length in the designed filters
CO4: Analyze discrete time LTI systems using Z-transform and DTFT
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /
EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

PC Loaded with MATLAB/Simulink or Other
1 30
Equivalent Software
2 Microphone and Speakers 15 each

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcom Outcomes
es PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 1 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2501 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Analysis and design of digital communication systems forms the basis for understanding
advanced digital modulation techniques, wireless and several other personal communication
systems. This course aims at covering the main topics such as digitization methods, waveform
coding techniques, and spread spectrum. It emphasizes the baseband and passband signal
transmission strategies. It also provides an in-depth analysis of error control coding. Hence
enables the students to get a better insight into the existing custom communications.

OBJECTIVES:
● To represent the analog signals in digital form using waveform coding techniques.
● To understand the ISI, pulse shaping and correlative coding.
● To comprehend the fundamentals of channel coding.
● To learn the principles of spread spectrum modulation schemes.

UNIT I WAVEFORM CODING TECHNIQUES 9

Sampling - Quantization, Quantization noise, Robust Quantization - Pulse Code Modulation -
Linear Prediction, Differential Pulse Code Modulation - Delta modulation - Adaptive Differential
Pulse Code Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation.
UNIT II BASEBAND SIGNALLING 9
Line codes and PSD of line codes - Inter Symbol Interference, Nyquist criterion for distortion
less transmission - Pulse shaping - Correlative level coding schemes - Eye pattern –
Equalization - Correlation receiver.

UNIT III BANDPASS MODULATION SCHEMES 9

Signal space representation – M-ary systems - Generation, detection, Power Spectral Density &
Bit Error Rate of coherent Binary Phase Shift Keying, Binary Frequency Shift Keying,
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying and Differential Phase Shift Keying - Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation – BER analysis.

UNIT IV ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Channel coding theorem - Linear block codes - Hamming codes - Cyclic codes - Convolutional
codes - Viterbi Decoder.

UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION 9

Pseudo noise sequences, Properties - Generation of Pseudo Noise sequences - Direct sequence
spread spectrum, Processing gain, Jamming Margin, Slow and Fast frequency hop spread
spectrum.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

CO1: Represent and analyze analog signals through different waveform coding
technique.
CO2: Comprehend the properties and performance of Line codes
CO3: Apply the knowledge of ISI problems to understand the related combating
Solutions.
CO4: Compare the error probability of different digital modulation schemes
CO5: Apply various error control coding schemes over information bits
CO6. Describe spread spectrum modulation scheme and illustrate both DS and FH
Systems

TEXT BOOK:
1. Haykin S, Digital Communications, John Wiley, 2005. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Proakis J.G, Digital Communication, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, Fifth Edition,
2. Bernard Sklar and Fredrick.J.Harris, Digital Communications: Fundamentals and
Applications, Third Edition, 2020
3. Lathi B. P, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University
Press, Third Edition, 2007
 4. Hsu H.P, Schaum’s Outline Series – Analog and Digital Communications, Tata Mc
Graw Hill Company, Third Edition, 2006.
5. Roody D, Coolen J, Electronic Communications, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2006.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3
CO6 3 2 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

TRANSMISSION LINES AND
UEC2502 3 0 0 3
WAVEGUIDES

PREAMBLE:
This course aims to provide students with the technological skills needed in understanding the
behaviour of parallel-wire transmission lines, parallel planes, and waveguides. Having obtained
a better understanding on the electromagnetic field theory in the fourth semester, this course will
enable the students to learn about the types of fields and field propagation in parallel planes,
rectangular and circular waveguides. This course also provides a broad overview on the
impedance matching in high frequency transmission lines.

OBJECTIVES:
● To impart knowledge on the passive filter theory.
● To introduce the types of transmission lines and discuss the associated losses.
● To provide thorough understanding about impedance transformation and matching
● To utilize the Smith chart in transmission line problem solving.
● To give insight about the field concepts of parallel planes and waveguides
UNIT I PASSIVE FILTERS 9
Symmetrical networks: Characteristic impedance and propagation constant - Filter fundamentals:
pass and stop bands - Design of filters: constant k - lowpass, highpass, bandpass, bandstop, m-
derived sections - low pass and high pass filters.

UNIT II TRANSMISSION LINE FUNDAMENTALS 9

General theory of transmission lines - General solution - Significance of line equations - infinite
line - Wavelength, velocity of propagation - Waveform distortion, distortion less line - Loading
and different methods of loading - Line not terminated in Z0 - Reflection coefficient - calculation
of current, voltage and power delivered - Input and transfer impedance - Open and short-
circuited lines - Reflection factor and reflection loss.

UNIT III LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCIES 9

Constants for line of zero dissipation - Transmission line equations at radio frequencies - Standing
waves, nodes, standing wave ratio - Input impedance of dissipation less line - Open and short-
circuited lines - Power and impedance measurement on lines - Reflection losses on unmatched
line.

UNIT IV IMPEDANCE MATCHING IN HIGH- FREQUENCY LINES 9

Impedance matching: Quarter-wave line and applications, Half-wave and eighth-wave line -
Impedance matching by stubs - Single stub and double stub matching - Smith circle equations -
Determination of load impedance, input impedance, reflection coefficient, VSWR, location of
Vmin and Vmax - Single and double stub matching using Smith chart

UNIT V WAVEGUIDES 9
General wave behaviours along uniform guiding structures - Transverse Magnetic (TM) waves,
Transverse Electric (TE) waves and Transverse Electromagnetic (TEM) waves between parallel
planes - TM and TE waves in rectangular waveguides - Impossibility of TEM in rectangular
waveguides - Bessel’s differential equation and Bessel function, TM and TE waves in circular
waveguides.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Apply the knowledge of filter theory in the design of passive filters.
CO2: Comprehend the working of lossy and lossless transmission lines
In RF applications.
CO3: Solve RF line problems and stub matching using Smith chart.
CO4: Analyze the field components of parallel planes and waveguides.

TEXT BOOK:
1. John D Ryder, Networks, Lines and Fields, Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jordan E.C and Balmain K.G, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems,
Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition, 2011.
 2. Cheng D.K, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, Pearson Education, Second Edition
2006.
3. Ulaby F.T, Michielssen E and Ravaioli U, Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics
Pearson Education, Sixth Edition, 2015.
4. Umesh Sinha, Transmission Lines and Networks, Sathya Prakashan, 2010.
5. Raju G.S.N, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines, Pearson
Education 2006.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 1 3 3 1
CO2 2 3 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2503 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS 3 0 2 4

PREAMBLE:
Communication network is the basis of communication in information technology. Its purpose is
to distribute/share/communicate information from one device to the other. It is the study of
procedural setup, standards, protocols and algorithms that are followed to have communication
among the devices interconnected to in a network. This course is the foundation for all the
networking subjects like computer networks, wireless networks and optical networks.

OBJECTIVES:
● To gain basic and conceptual understanding of computer network.
● To develop an understanding of the flow control and congestion control algorithms.
● To analyze multiple access techniques, network protocols and QoS protocols.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS & LINK LAYER 9

Data Communications- Networks – Network and its types – Protocol Layering - OSI Model –
TCP/IP model – Introduction to Circuit Switching & Packet Switching - Introduction to Data
Link Layer - Link Layer Addressing- Framing – Flow & Error Control – Stop & Wait, Go-Back
N, Selective Repeat - Error Detection – CRC, Checksum.
UNIT II MEDIA ACCESS & INTERNETWORKING 9
Media Access Control - CSMA/CD (IEEE 802.3), CSMA/CA (IEEE 802.11) - Network layer
services – Packet Switching – IPV4 Addresses – Network layer protocols (IP, ICMP, Mobile
IP) - Overview of IPv6 Addressing – Transition from IPv4 to IPv6.

UNIT III ROUTING 9

Routing – Introduction - Routing Algorithms – Distance vector routing, link – state routing -
Unicast Routing – Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP.

UNIT IV TRANSPORT & APPLICATION LAYER 9

Transport layer –Protocols- User Datagram Protocols (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocols
(TCP) –Services – Features – TCP Connection – State Transition Diagram – Flow, Error and
Congestion Control - Congestion avoidance (DECbit, RED) - Traditional applications -
Electronic Mail (SMTP, POP3, IMAP, MIME) – HTTP.

UNIT V PROTOCOLS FOR QoS SUPPORT 9

QoS – Application requirements. Integrated Services, Differentiated Services, RSVP – Goals &
Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms – Multiprotocol Label
Switching – Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details - RTP – Protocol Architecture

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30
1. Suggest a flow control mechanism that is efficient for noisy links, develop an algorithm
and interpret the results using an appropriate software tool.
2. Suggest a flow control mechanism that is inefficient for noisy links, develop an algorithm
and interpret the results using an appropriate software tool.
3. Develop an appropriate routing algorithm for a data communication network where each
node shares its routing table with its immediate neighbors periodically and when there is
a change. Interpret the research findings using an appropriate software tool.
4. Assuming a network scenario where every node constructs a map of the connectivity to
the network, in the form of a graph, showing which nodes are connected to which other
nodes, suggest a routing algorithm with which each node can independently calculate the
next best logical path from to every possible destination in the network, wherein each
collection of best paths will then form each node’s routing table.
5. Suggest a mechanism that compares the amount of energy on the media after a packet is
transmitted. If the value is greater than the energy used by the transmitting device, then a
collision has occurred. If there is no difference in two measured values, then a collision
has not occurred. Plot the throughput performance of the same.
6. In wireless networks, the terminals can each be within range of some intended third
terminal but out of range of each other, because they are separated by excessive distance
or by some physical obstacles that makes direct communication between the two
terminals impossible. Suggest and plot the throughput performance of the protocol that
Can be used to avoid this problem

TOTAL PERIODS: 75
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Demonstrate various networking components and their respective roles in a
Communication system.
CO2: Analyze the required functionality at each layer for a given application
CO3: Design and apply routing mechanisms to fulfil the networking requirements
CO4: Analyze the features and operations of various Quality of service protocols.
CO5: Evaluate relevance and use of engineering fundamentals in communication
networks to advanced industrial applications or products and their
Impact on safety, society as well as underlying legal and ethical considerations.
CO6: Communicate effectively through reflections, reports and presentations.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, ―Data communication and Networkingǁ, Fifth Edition, Tata
McGraw – Hill, 2013 (Unit I to IV).
2. William Stallings, High Speed Networks and Internet, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2002 (Unit V).

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, ― Computer Networks: A Systems Approachǁ,
Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
2. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, ― Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach
Featuring the Internetǁ, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
3. Nader. F. Mir, ― Computer and Communication Networksǁ, Pearson Prentice Hall
Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.
4. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang, Fred Baker, ―Computer Networks: An Open
Source Approach, Mc Graw Hill Publisher, 2011
5. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2011.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 1 2 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2

CO5 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

CO6 1 2 2 1 1 1
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2504 PRINCIPLES OF VLSI DESIGN 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
The electronics industry is rapidly approaching another revolutionary leap in the global market
scenario. Semiconductor technology has crossed the quarter-micron threshold, making billions
of transistors available on a single chip. VLSI (Very Large-Scale Integration) technology has
emerged as a very important technology in modern electronics featuring deep sub-micron
manufacturing processes, low voltage operations, exploding speeds and smart programmable
devices. This course introduces the fundamental concepts of the VLSI and implementation of
digital circuits using CMOS transistors. This VLSI Design course will help to acquire knowledge
in semiconductor technology and to generate skilled manpower in IC design and manufacturing.
The prerequisite for the course is the basic knowledge of Digital circuit design.

OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the principles of VLSI System Design.
● To study operation, characteristics, layout & fabrication of MOS Transistor and design
of CMOS Inverter.
● To design CMOS Combinational & Sequential Logic Circuits and Arithmetic Blocks.
● To learn the testability of VLSI circuits.

UNIT I VLSI SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Introduction to VLSI Design: VLSI Design Problem - VLSI Design Cycle - VLSI Design
Domains - Types of IC Design – Hierarchical Design Approach - VLSI Design Principles.
Implementation Methodologies: Full Custom Design - Standard Cell Based Design - Gate Array
Based Design - Programmable Logic Devices Based Design – Overview of SPLD/CPLD/FPGA
Architectures.

UNIT II MOS TRANSISTOR 9

Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) Transistor: Structure, Operation & Characteristics -
Threshold Voltage (VT0 & VT), Drain Current (ID). MOS Capacitances - MOS Scaling - Second
Order & Non Ideal Effects - Modeling of MOS Transistor – SPICE Models - Fabrication Cycle,
NMOS & PMOS Fabrication Processes. Layout Design Rules, Full-Custom Mask Layout
Design, Stick Diagrams.

UNIT III CMOS INVERTER 9

CMOS Inverter: Construction and Operation - Static & Dynamic Characteristics – Inverter
Design with Delay Constraints, Estimation of Interconnect Parasitics & Delay. Power analysis of
CMOS Inverter – Low Power Design Principles. Fabrication & Layout of CMOS Inverter: n-
well, p-well, twin-tub & triple-well processes. Latch-Up in CMOS Technology. Layout and Stick
Diagram of CMOS Inverter.

UNIT IV CMOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Combinational MOS Logic Circuits: Classical CMOS logic – Pseudo-nMOS logic –
Transmission Gates – Design Examples: Basic Gates, Complex Logic Circuits. Sequential MOS
Logic Circuits: Behavior of Bistable Elements – SR latch – Clocked Latch and Flip-flop – Timing
parameters of Clocked Storage Elements – CMOS D Latch and Edge Triggered Flip-
Flop. Dynamic Logic Circuits: Dynamic CMOS Circuit Techniques – High Performance
Dynamic CMOS Circuits.

UNIT V ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS & TESTING 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Adders – Multipliers – Shifters. Design for Testability: Fault Types
and Models, Ad Hoc Testable Design Techniques, Scan-Based Techniques, Boundary Scan
Testing, Built-In Self-Test (BIST) Techniques, Automatic Test Pattern Generation (ATPG), Fault
Simulation, Current Monitoring IDDQ Test.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Summarize various VLSI design principles and methodologies
CO2: Describe operation, characteristics, layout and fabrication of MOS Transistor and
design CMOS Inverter.
CO3: Apply design concepts to realize CMOS Combinational Logic Circuits and
Sequential Logic Circuits.
CO4: Analyze various architectures of Arithmetic Building Blocks and implement testing
techniques to CMOS VLSI Circuits.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Sung Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, Chulwoo Kim, CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Mc
Graw Hill India, Fourth Edition, 2016. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits:
A Design Perspective, Pearson Education India, Second Edition, 2016
2. David Money Harris, Neil Weste and Ayan Banerjee, CMOS VLSI Design: A circuits
and Systems Perspective, Pearson Education India, Fourth Edition, 2016.
3. Jacob Baker R, CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation, Wiley Student Edition
2018.
4. Uyemura J. P, Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems, Wiley Student Edition,
2015
5. Douglas A. Pucknell and Kamran Eshraghian, Basic VLSI Design, Prentice Hall,
Third Edition, 2016.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
ANALOG AND DIGITAL
UEC2511 0 0 3 1.5
COMMUNICATION LAB

PREAMBLE
This lab provides an experimental examination of various building blocks of the analog and
digital communication systems. Students could comprehend the necessity of each block and
evaluate their performances through kit and software based implementations. Knowledge of
Fourier Transform and Probability Theory would enhance the level of understanding.

OBJECTIVES
• To implement the analog modulation schemes
• To understand the various waveform coding techniques
• To comprehend and simulate Digital Modulation schemes
• To simulate Error control coding schemes

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. AM Modulator and Demodulator
2. FM Modulator
3. Time Division Multiplexing
4. Pulse Code Modulation
5. Delta Modulation
6. Line coding schemes
Using Matlab Simulation:
7. Digital representation of Analog Signals - PCM and DM
8. Generation and Coherent Detection of BPSK
9. Generation and Coherent Detection of BFSK
10. Modulated Signal Generation- DPSK, QPSK and QAM schemes
11. Simulation of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK and QAM
12. Implementation of a (n, k) error control coder - Linear Block Code and Cyclic Code
13. Implementation of a (n, k, K) Convolutional coder
14. BER analysis through Communication link simulation- M-ary PSK
15. Simulation of Spread Spectrum Modulation Technique

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 : Construct circuits to experiment the Amplitude and Frequency modulation methods
CO2 : Demonstrate their knowledge in baseband signalling schemes through the
implementation of PCM, DM and line coding schemes
CO3 : Simulate an end-to-end communication link and analyze the effect of noise on the
performance of the entire system.
CO4 : Apply various error control coding schemes over information bits
CO5 : Demonstrate their knowledge in spread spectrum modulation techniques
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /
EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

Kits for AM, FM, TDM, PCM, DM and Line Coding
1 3 each
Schemes
2 CRO (20 MHz) and Function Generators (3 MHz) 15
MATLAB / SCILAB or equivalent software package
3
for simulation experiments
4 Dual Regulated Power Supplies (0-30 V) 15
5 PC 15

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2512 VLSI DESIGN LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) are important semiconductor devices. FPGAs can be
reprogrammed to desired applications after manufacturing. Due to their programmable nature,
FPGAs are an ideal fit for many different applications such as Industrial, Medical, Consumer
Electronics, Wired/Wireless Communications, etc. CMOS technology continues to be the
dominant technology for fabricating integrated circuits (ICs). CMOS technology is reliable,
easily manufacturable, low power, and most importantly, scalable. This course provides the basic
knowledge required for synthesis and hardware implementation of digital integrated circuits
using a hardware description language, and to apply these in practice on FPGA boards and also
this course provides hands on experience in CMOS digital circuit design using CAD tools.

OBJECTIVES
• To learn Hardware Descriptive Language (Verilog/VHDL)
• To learn the design principles of VLSI circuits in digital and analog domain
 • To familiarize fusing of logical modules on FPGAs
• To provide hands on design experience with professional design (EDA) platforms

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING HDL
1. Design of 4-Bit Carry Look Ahead Adder
2. Design of 4-Bit Booth Multiplier Time Division Multiplexing
3. Design of 8-bit MAC unit
4. Design of 8-Bit ALU
5. Design of 4-Bit Synchronous Up/Down Counter
6. Design of 4-Bit Universal Shift Register
7. Design of Moore FSM
8. Design of Mealy FSM
For the experiments 1-8:
• Use VHDL/Verilog to model either in structural and/or behavioural domains
• Simulate it using by Xilinx/Altera Software
• Implement and Verify the functionality using Xilinx/Altera FPGA Trainer Kit

CMOS DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN

9. Basic CMOS logic gates
10. Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor & Full Subtractor using the Cells developed in
Expt. No. 09
11. CMOS Latches & Flip Flops using the Cells developed in Expt. No. 09
12. 4-Bit Synchronous Up/Down Counter using the Cells developed in Expt. No. 11
For the experiments 9-12: Design, Construct and Verify at circuit level
For the experiments 9-11: Perform Post Layout Simulation
Use CAD Tools: Cadence//Mentor Graphics/Tanner

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 : Write HDL code for digital integrated circuits, import HDL code & verify the
functionality of the logic modules into FPGA Trainer Boards.
CO2 : Design and simulate CMOS Digital Circuits using EDA tools
CO3 : Perform post layout simulation using EDA tools

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /

EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

Xilinx/Altera FPGA Synthesis Software with Trainer
1 15Nos
Kits
2 Tanner/Mentor Graphics / Cadence Tools/equivalent 15User License
3 Personal Computer 15Nos
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING
Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2601 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
It is important that communications engineers understand wireless systems, especially digital
cellular systems. Wireless industry has become the fastest growing sector of the
telecommunications industry, and there is hardly anybody in the world who is not a user of some
form of wireless technology. From the ubiquitous cellphones, to wireless LANs, to wireless
sensors that are proliferating – we are surrounded by wireless communications devices. One of
the key challenges in studying wireless communications is the amazing breadth of topics that
impacts this field. This course introduces the methods towards design and analysis of digital
cellular systems. The main topics covered are wireless channel and system models, multicarrier
modulation, equalization, diversity and spatial multiplexing. This course tries to get students the
required foundation for taking up courses on advanced wireless communications including
massive MIMO.

OBJECTIVES:
● To gain knowledge about technical challenges of wireless communications, and noise
and interference limited systems.
● To learn about wireless propagation channels.
● To comprehend the concepts +of diversity and equalization in wireless communications.
● To understand the concepts and benefits of multiple access and advanced transceiver
schemes.
● To acquire knowledge about multiantenna systems and wireless standards

UNIT I WIRELESS PROPAGATION CHANNELS 9

Technical Challenges of Wireless Communications, Noise- and Interference-Limited Systems,
Propagation Mechanisms-Free Space Attenuation, Reflection and Transmission-The d−4 Power
Law, Derivation of the d−4 Law, Statistical Description of the Wireless Channel-Small-Scale
Fading without a Dominant Component, Small-Scale Fading with a Dominant Component,
Doppler Spectra and Temporal Channel Variations, Temporal Dependence of Fading, Large-
Scale Fading.
UNIT II DIVERSITY 9
Introduction-Principle of Diversity, Definition of the Correlation Coefficient, Microdiversity,
Macrodiversity and Simulcast, Combination of Signals, Error Probability in Fading Channels
with Diversity Reception, Transmit Diversity.

UNIT III EQUALIZERS 9

Introduction, Linear Equalizers, Decision Feedback Equalizers, Maximum Likelihood Sequence
Estimation – Viterbi Detector, Comparison of Equalizer Structures, Blind Equalizer-Blind
Maximum Likelihood Estimation.

UNIT IV MULTIPLE ACCESS AND ADVANCED TRANSCEIVER SCHEMES 9

Multiple Access and the Cellular Principle-Frequency Division Multiple Access, Time Division
Multiple Access, Duplexing, Principles of Cellular Networks, Co channel and Adjacent Channel
Interference, C/I, Handoff, Cellular Code-Division-Multiple-Access Systems, Multiuser
Detection, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM)- Principle, Implementation of
Transceivers, Frequency-Selective Channels, Peak-to-Average Power Ratio, Inter Carrier
Interference, Multiple Access – OFDMA, Multicarrier Code Division Multiple Access.

UNIT V MULTIANTENNA AND STANDARDIZED WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9

Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems-System Model, Channel State Information, Spatial
Multiplexing, Layered Space–Time Structure, Tradeoffs between Diversity, Beamforming Gain,
and Spatial Multiplexing, Multiuser MIMO.System Overview-GSM, IS-95 and CDMA 2000,
WCDMA/UMTS, WiMAX/IEEE 802.16, LTE.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Comprehend the impact of noise and interference in wireless communications.
CO2: Determine the appropriate fading channel models based on the design parameters.
CO3: Analyze and design diversity and equalization techniques.
CO4: Understand the design of multiple access and multi-carrier systems.
CO5: Analyze the performance of multi antenna systems and different wireless standards

TEXT BOOK:
1. Andreas F. Molisch, Wireless Communications, John Wiley India, Second Edition,
2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rappaport T.S, Wireless communications, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2014.
2. Gordon L. Stuber, Principles of Mobile Communication, Springer International Ltd,
Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2007.
4. Simon Haykin & Michael Moher, adapted by David Kovilpillai, Modern Wireless
Communications, Pearson Education, 2011.
5. David Tse and Pramod Vishwanath, Fundamentals of Wireless Communication Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
6. Abd-Elhamid M. Taha, Hossam S. Hassanein and Najah Abu Ali. “LTE, LTE-Advanced
and WiMAX towards IMT-Advanced networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2012
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 1 3 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 1 3 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2602 SYSTEM DESIGN FOR IoT 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
The Internet of Things (IoT) is a network of physical objects that are embedded with sensors,
software, and other technologies for the purpose of connecting and exchanging data with other
devices and systems over the internet. Nowadays IoT enabled devices are designed and developed
for wide range of applications such as building and home automation, smart city, smart grid,
smart agriculture, transportation, military and healthcare etc. System Design for IoT is one of the
most essential subjects for Electronics and Communication Engineers. The main topics covered
are fundamental concepts, Architectures & Protocols, Security issues, steps to build IoT systems
and few case studies.

OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the fundamentals of Internet of Things and interference limited systems.
• To understand IoT Reference Model and IoT Reference Architecture.
• To learn about the basics of IoT protocols.
• To understand the security issues possible with IoT schemes.
• To build a small low cost IoT system and to apply the concept of Internet of Things in
the real world scenario

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF IoT 9

Internet of Things - Physical Design- Logical Design - IoT Enabling Technologies - IoT Levels
& Deployment Templates - Domain Specific IoTs - IoT and M2M - IoT System Management –
YANG Model.

UNIT II IoT ARCHITECTURES 9

IoT Platform Design Methodology-Purpose & Requirements specification, process specification,
domain model specification, information model specification, service specification, IoT level
specifications, functional view specification, operational view specification, device and
component integration, application development.

UNIT III IoT PROTOCOLS 9

Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – Zigbee – BACNet – Modbus – 6LowPAN – CoAP-MQTT - LoRA
- SigFox..

UNIT IV SECURITY ISSUES OVERVIEW 9

Introduction – Phases of IoT System – Internet of Things as Interconnection of Threats – Phase
attacks: Data leakage or breach, data sovereignty, data loss, data authentication, attack on
availability, modification of sensitive data – Attacks as per architecture – Attacks based on
components.

UNIT V BUILDING IoT SYSTEM & CASE STUDIES 9

IoT Physical Devices & Endpoints - Basic building blocks of an IoT Device - Raspberry Pi -
Board - Linux on Raspberry Pi - Raspberry Pi Interfaces -Programming Raspberry Pi with Python
- Real world design constraints – IoT use cases – Case Study: Commercial building

Automation today and in the future: Background, Technology overview, and Evolved value chain
for commercial building automation – Case Study: Smart cities: The need, working definition,
some examples, Roles – actors – engagement, Transport and logistics – an IoT perspective.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Interpret the fundamental concepts of IoT
CO2: Develop IoT Architecture for a particular application scenario
CO3: Identify the correct protocol for a specific application
CO4: Identify the security issues possible with IoT systems
CO5: Design a portable IoT using Raspberry Pi, Analyze applications of IoT in real time
Scenario

TEXT BOOK:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay Madisetti, Internet of Things – A hands-on approach
Universities Press, 2015. (UNIT – I, II, V).
2. Rolando Herrero, Fundamentals of IoT Communication Technologies, Springer, 2022.
ISBN 978-3-030-70080-5 (UNIT-III)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fei Hu, Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms &
Implementations, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis group, 2016. (UNIT –IV).
2. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis, Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand
and David Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things - Introduction to a
New Age of Intelligence, Elsevier, 2014.
3. Honbo Zhou, the Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective, CRC
Press, 2012.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Michahelles Florian (Eds), Architecting the
Internet of Things, Springer, 2011.
 5. Mayur Ramgir, Internet of Things- Architecture, Implementation, and SecuritY, Pearson
Education, 2019

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

MICROWAVE AND ANTENNA

UEC2603 3 0 0 3
ENGINEERING

PREAMBLE:
This course provides an in-depth understanding of microwave engineering and antennas. The
prerequisite for the course is basic knowledge of electromagnetic fields and transmission lines.
Future applications, like smart antennas and antenna beamforming techniques require expertise
in both antennas and microwave electronics. This course provides the required theoretical
foundation for the design and development of such antenna and microwave systems.

OBJECTIVES:
• To study the various microwave sources, microwave passive and active devices.
• To understand the basic antenna parameters and the radiation principles of wire antennas.
• To learn the design and operation of array and aperture antennas.
• To study the various antenna and microwave measurement techniques.

UNIT I MICROWAVE GENERATION AND COMPONENTS 9

Microwave Sources: Microwave frequency bands, Theory and operation of two cavity klystron
amplifier, Reflex klystron, TWT, Cylindrical magnetron.
Microwave devices: Microwave Hybrid Circuits, Directional couplers, Circulator, Isolator, Gunn
diode and IMPATT diode.
UNIT II ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Physical concept of radiation, Near- and far-field regions, Fields and Power Radiated by an
Antenna, Antenna Pattern Characteristics, Antenna Gain and Efficiency, Aperture Efficiency and
Effective Area, Radiation from the Hertzian dipole, short dipole and half wavelength dipole.

UNIT III ARRAY AND APERTURE ANTENNAS 9

Antenna Arrays: Two element and N-element linear array, Pattern multiplication, Broadside and
end-fire array, Array synthesis: Binomial array.
Aperture Antennas: Horn antennas, Reflector antennas, Slot antennas

UNIT IV SPECIAL ANTENNAS 9

Yagi-Uda Array, Helical Antenna, Log-periodic dipole array, Spiral antenna, Microstrip patch
antenna, Smart antennas and antenna beamforming.

UNIT V MEASUREMENTS 9
Frequency measurement, Power measurement, VSWR Measurement, Antenna measurement
Range, Radiation pattern measurement, Gain and directivity measurement, Polarization
measurement.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Identify and explain the operation of microwave sources and devices
CO2: Comprehend antenna parameters and the radiation mechanism of simple antennas to
complex antenna structures
CO3: Design antennas for given specifications and perform array synthesis
CO4: Acquire knowledge on the operation of antennas designed for specific applications
CO5: Evaluate antenna and microwave parameters using appropriate systems and techniques

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, Pearson, Third Edition, 2003. (Unit I)
2. Harish A R and Sachidananda M, Antennas and Wave Propagation, Oxford University
Press, Fourth Edition, 2007. (Unit II to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, Antennas and Wave
Propagation, Tata McGraw-Hill, Fourth Edition, 2006.
2. Balanis C A, Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Fourth
Edition, 2016.
1. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Fourth Edition 2012
2. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, Microwave Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009.
3. Warren L Stutzman and Gary A. Thiele, Antenna Theory and Design, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., Third Edition, 2012
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 2 1 2
CO2 2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2604 MACHINE LEARNING 3 0 2 4

PREAMBLE:
Machine learning is a branch of artificial intelligence wherein concepts/hypothesis/patterns are
learnt from data by using heuristic algorithms. This course provides a broad perspective of the
Machine learning framework and introduces the core concepts of supervised, unsupervised,
evolutionary and reinforcement learning. Moreover, this course will give an insight to artificial
neural network, deep learning techniques and its application. Furthermore, the course gives
hands-on experience to develop a mini project using state-of-the-art machine learning concept.

OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the fundamental concepts of machine learning.
• To explain the core concepts of learning methods such as supervised, unsupervised,
evolutionary and reinforcement learning techniques.
• To understand the concepts of artificial neural network and deep learning of learning.
• To provide exposure to the students with hands-on experience on various machine
learning techniques.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF MACHINE LEARNING 9

Introduction to machine learning - Types of machine learning: supervised, unsupervised and
reinforcement learning - The machine learning process – Basic terminologies in machine learning
– datasets, weight space, the curse of dimensionality, overfitting, accuracy metrics - Perspectives
and issues in machine learning.

UNIT II SUPERVISED LEARNING 9

Bayes decision theory - Minimum-error-rate classification – Linear Regression - Logistic
Regression – K-Nearest Neighbor - Support Vector Machines (SVM) - Learning with decision
Trees – Constructing decision trees – Classification and Regression Trees (CART) - Ensemble
learning: boosting, bagging and random forest.
UNIT III UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Clustering: K-means – Adaptive K-means - K Nearest Neighbours - Vector Quantization.
Dimensionality reduction: Linear Discriminant Analysis (LDA) - Principal Component
Analysis (PCA) - Independent component analysis (ICA)

UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY AND REINFORCEMENT LEARNING 9

Evolutionary Learning: Genetic algorithms – Genetic offspring – Genetic operators – Using
Genetic algorithms. Reinforcement Learning: State and action space – Rewards function –
Discounting – Action selection – Policy – Markov decision process – Values - Uses of
reinforcement learning.

UNIT IV ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND DEEP LEARNING 9

Learning - The brain and the neuron - Models of a neuron - Feed-Forward neural networks -
Perceptron learning - Multi-layer feed-forward neural network - Gradient descent -Back

Propagation algorithm. Introduction to Deep Neural Network (DNN) – Convolutional Neural

Network – Auto Encoders – Applications of Deep Learning Networks.
MINI PROJECT 30
Students can be assessed based on a mini project that involves application of various machine
learning algorithms on a given text/speech/image/video dataset. A written report on the results
and a presentation can be included as a part of assessment.

LIST OF PROJECTS:
1. Textual description of images
2. Car damage assessment with cost estimation
3. Estimating facial features using speech
4. Speech reconstruction from silent video
5. Quality check for manuscripts/reports for possible acceptance
6. Fake news detection in social media
7. Food calories analytics
8. Predictive maintenance of automobiles
9. Any other similar projects related to machine/deep learning
TOTAL PERIODS: 75
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Describe the fundamental framework of machine learning.
CO2: Explain the core concepts of Supervised, Unsupervised, Evolutionary and
Reinforcement learning
CO3: Apply dimensionality reduction techniques for machine learning problems
CO4: Explain the artificial neural network and DNN for machine learning applications
CO5: Design and implement various machine learning algorithms to solve real-world
Applications for societal transformations
CO6: Communicate effectively through reflections, reports and presentations for better
Teamwork
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen Marsland - Machine learning - an algorithmic perspective, Chapman and Hall /
CRC machine learning and Pattern recognition series, Second Edition, 2014. (Unit ItoIV)
2. Duda R.O., Hart P.E. and Stork D.G., Pattern Classification, John Wiley, 2001. (Unit II)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bishop C.M, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer, 2006.
2. Simon Haykin, Neural networks - a comprehensive foundation, Pearson Education,
Second Edition, 2008.
3. Tom. M. Mitchell, Machine learning, McGraw Hill education, First Edition, 2013.
4. Francois Chollet, Deep Learning with Python, Manning Publication, 2017.
5. Sebastian Raschka and Vahid Mirjalili, Python Machine Learning, Second Edition, Packt
Publishing Ltd., Livery Place, UK, 2017.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3
CO6 2 1 3 3 1 1 3 1 3

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2611 MICROWAVE AND ANTENNAS LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
This course explores the concepts of antenna and microwave systems in a laboratory setting with
an emphasis on measurement techniques. The objective of this course is to enable the students to
design, simulate and experiment the characteristics of microwave devices, sources and antennas.

OBJECTIVES
• To learn the various microwave sources, microwave passive and active devices
• To understand the antenna and microwave measurement techniques
• To understand antenna parameters and the radiation principles of wire antennas
• To understand the design and operation of array and aperture antennas
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Mode Characteristics of Reflex Klystron
2. VI Characteristics of Gunn diode and attenuation measurement
3. Measurement of VSWR, frequency and wavelength using Reflex Klystron
4. S parameter analysis of E plane Tee, H plane Tee and Magic Tee
5. S parameter analysis of Isolator and circulator
6. S parameter analysis of Directional Coupler
7. Characterization of microwave integrated circuits using the vector network analyzer
8. Design and characterization of a printed monopole antenna
9. Design and characterization of a microstrip patch antenna
10. Design of a horn antenna and analysis using the 3D electromagnetic tool
11. Radiation pattern and gain measurement of X band horn antenna
12. Design of beam-steering antennas
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 : Characterize microwave components using S parameters
CO2 : Operate vector network analyzer for microwave measurements
CO3 : Design antennas and analyze its characteristics
CO4 : Determine antenna parameters using real-time measurements

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /

EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

1 Microwave Test Bench at X band 6
2 PC loaded with CST Microwave Studio Suite 4
3 Vector Network Analyzer 1
4 MIC trainer kit 1

CO – PO/PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2612 SYSTEM DESIGN FOR IoT LAB 0 0 3 1.5

PREAMBLE
System Design for IoT Laboratory is one of the most essential practical courses for Electronics
and Communication Engineers. The students are trained to apply the IoT principles and design
tools for building IoT enabled systems for few real world scenarios. The course also gives an in-
depth knowledge about recording and reporting the measure data with connectivity between the
developed system and the cloud. The course also gives an introduction about implementing
control applications.

OBJECTIVES
• To understand about the different boards available to develop IoT system
• To build an IoT system and connect to the cloud
• To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real world scenario
• To implement actuator control in the IoT system

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART I
1. Configure Raspberry Pi and energize it for blinking a LED
2. Access real time sensor data: IR sensor, PIR sensor, Ultrasonic sensor & Soil moisture
sensor
3. Acquisition of Real-time temperature and humidity sensor data over cloud
4. Design an alert system by analyzing the physical parameters over cloud
5. IEEE 802.15.4 CSMA – MAC implementation using MATLAB
6. Developing a lightweight cryptographic algorithm suitable for IoT devices

PART II
Mini project on building IoT system for specific applications
1. IoT based intelligent traffic management system
2. Smart irrigation system using IoT
3. IoT based smart waste management system for smart city
4. IoT based weather reporting system
5. IoT based water management system

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 : Use Raspberry Pi for IoT systems
CO2 : Apply IoT principles and design tools for developing IoT systems
CO3 : Comprehensively record and report the measured data
CO4 : Establish connectivity between IoT system and cloud
CO5 : Implement control applications using IoT
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /
EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

Raspberry Pi 3 model B with accessories (SD card,
1 power adapter HDMI to VGA connector, USB mouse, 15
Keyboard)
2 Personal Computer 15
Sensors and interfaces based on the application to be
3 5 Nos. each
build
Freeware available for installation of OS - SD card
4 formatter, Win32 disk images, Operating system - 15
Raspbian Buster, Cloud platform –Thingspeak

CO – PO/PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

HIGH FREQUENCY
UEC2701 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
This course provides an in-depth understanding of Optical and High frequency Communication
systems. With the development trend of wireless and broadband in the communication link, the
demand of high-frequency microwave bandwidth has been increasing. The problem of spectrum
congestion in low-frequency bands can be solved by providing signals at mm wave frequency
microwave optical fiber links. The prerequisite for the course is basic knowledge of
electromagnetic fields and wireless communication.

OBJECTIVES:
• Understand the mechanism of light propagation for signal transmission within a fiber.
• Understand the components of Fiber optic networking.
 • Understand the fundamentals issues related to mmWave propagation.
• Appreciate the design requirements for mmWave Communications system.

UNIT I LIGHT PROPAGATION IN FIBER OPTICS 9

Transmission Characteristics of Fibres: Attenuation, material absorption and scattering loss,
bending loss, intra-modal and inter-modal dispersion in step and graded fibres, FOC System
description and design considerations.

UNIT II FIBER OPTIC NETWORKS 9

Principles of WDM, DWDM, Telecommunications & broadband application, wavelength-routed
networks SONET/SDH, MUX, Analog & Digital broadband, optical switching.

UNIT III FREE SPACE OPTICAL COMMUNICATION 9

Propagation of light in unguided media, LASER beam characteristics, atmospheric effects on
optical signals, FSO transceiver design, Point-to-Point FSO systems, point-to-point with
transponder nodes, Hybrid FSO and RF, FSO applications , LIDAR

UNIT IV MILLIMETER WAVE PROPAGATION 9

Radio Wave Propagation for Mm Wave, Large-Scale and small scale propagation effects of Mm
waves, Outdoor Channel Models, Indoor Channel Models, Vehicle-to-Vehicle Models, Spatial
Characterization of Multipath and Beam Combining, Angle Spread and Multipath Angle of
Arrival.

UNIT V MILLIMETER WAVE COMMUNICATION 9

Arrays and antenna topologies for MmWave Communications, Adaptive Antenna Arrays —
Beam Steering and Beamforming, ESPRIT and MUSIC, Emerging Applications of MmWave
Communications – Massive MIMO.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Identify the fiber optic communications system and components for networking
CO2: Explain the merits of fiber optic networks and multiplexing of light signals
CO3: Design free space light communication against atmospheric effects
CO4: Art the need for mm Wave Communications systems
CO5: Design applications involving mm Wave systems for high bit rate communications

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, 2nd Edition, McGraw - Hill, 2007 (Unit I
&II).
2. Theodore S. Rappaport, Robert W. Heath, Robert C. Daniels, and James N. Murdock
Millimeter Wave Wireless Communications, PHI, 2018 (Unit IV & Unit V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stamatios V. Kartalopoulos, Free Space Optical Networks for Ultra-Broad Band
Services, First Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2011 (Unit III)
2. John M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communication, 3rd Edition, PHI/Pearson, 2009
3. G. Agrawal, Fiber optic Communication Systems, 4th Edition, John Wiley and sons,
2010.
4. Ke Wang, Indoor Infrared Optical Wireless Communications Systems and Integration
CRC press, 2020
5. Manuel García Sanchez, Millimeter-Wave (mm Wave) Communications, MDPI, 2020

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO4 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 1

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
HIGH FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION
UEC2711 0 0 4 2
LAB

PREAMBLE
This course takes an experimental approach to advanced communication systems. Theory studied
in the context of digital communications, wireless and optical communications is translated
directly into practice with the help of the National Instruments USRP software defined radio
platform, MATLAB/IT++ and Optical trainer kits. The emphasis is on physical layer concepts
rather than implementation considerations. This lab course is unique because it approaches
wireless communications from the perspective of digital signal processing. Background in digital
communications and programming knowledge are assumed.

OBJECTIVES
• To get to know the actual building blocks of a communication link and their importance
in the system as a whole.
• To acquire in-depth knowledge on various advanced communication techniques with
hardware and software platforms
 • To understand various wireless channel impairments and their impact on the
performance of a wireless system and mitigation techniques
• To gain understanding on indoor and fixed channel models.
• To attain better knowledge on LABVIEW programming.
• To develop understanding of simple optical communication link.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Using NI USRP
1. BER analysis of Digital Modulation and Detection techniques
2. Demonstration of the impact of Pulse shaping and Matched Filtering
3. Channel estimation and linear equalization
4. Implementation of Frame Detection & Frequency Offset Correction Techniques
5. OFDM modulation including channel estimation, synchronization, and equalization
6. Implementation of channel coding in OFDM Systems

Simulation Using IT++ or Matlab

1. Simulation of small scale fading, large scale fading and link budgets
2. Study of receive diversity, selection diversity, and maximum ratio combining
3. Simulation of transmit diversity (Alamouti - STBC)
4. MIMO communication systems including spatial multiplexing
5. Simulation study of interference cancellation techniques in multiple-input multiple-
Output (MIMO) systems
6. Implementation of IEEE 802.11n standard (PHY layer)
7. Simulation of MIMO multipath fading channels based on the IEEE 802.11n channel
Models for indoor wireless local area networks (WLAN).
8. Simulation of MIMO multipath fading channels based on the IEEE 802.16 channel
Models for fixed wireless applications

Using Optical Trainer Kit

1. Measurement of connector, bending and fiber attenuation losses.
2. Numerical Aperture and Mode Characteristics of Fibers.
3. Study of the gain characteristics of an EDFA for various pump powers
4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link Characterization - frequency response (analog),
eye diagram and BER (digital)
5. Study of a WDM optical transmission link

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1 : Implement and demonstrate various digital modulation, transmission and signal
processing techniques using NI Hardware platform.
CO2 : Design multicarrier communications using NI USRP platform
CO3 : Simulate and construe the impact of fading and diversity techniques in wireless
Systems.
CO4 : Design and simulate realistic channel models for advanced wireless standards
CO5 : Analyse the performance of simple optical link by measurement of losses and
Analyzing the mode characteristics of fiber.
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 STUDENTS /
EXPERIMENT)

S.No Description of Equipment / Software Quantity

USRP Software Defined Radio Reconfigurable Device
1 6
- 3 sets of the transceiver
2 LABVIEW programming module 4
3 2 x 2 MIMO antenna - 3 pairs 6
4 IT++ or Matlab Simulation Software Installed PCs 10
5 Trainer kit for carrying out Fiber Optic experiments 2

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 2
 HUMANITIES I – ELECTIVES
COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE

UEN2241 LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
• To enhance communicative competence in general.
• To improve the ability of the students to negotiate with meaning in context.
• To develop speaking skills of the students for career needs.
• To develop sensitivity to gender, human rights, politeness and other aspects
• To enhance the skills in being persuasive in writing and speech

UNIT I APPROACHES TO COMMUNICATION 9

• The information Processing school, Shannon and Weaver; A Mathematical Theory of
• Communication, Formal Signal Processing approach.
• Semiotic approach; information, communication and significance.
• Chomskyan distinction between language structure and language use; form and function.
• Towards a theory of performance; acceptability and grammaticality.
• Communicative Competency; Possibility, appropriacy, feasibility.

UNIT II MEANING IN LANGUAGE USE 9

• Speech Act Theory; communicative activity, elocutionary act, directives, commissive,
• expressive, declarations and representatives.
• Grice’s theory of conversational meaning; the cooperative principle, quantity
maxim, quality
• maxim, relational maxim, manner maxim.
• Ancient Indian theory of meaning; lexical, compositional, extended.
• Speaker intention in communication.
• Discourse meaning; context and situation.

UNIT III STRUCTURE OF DISCOURSE/CONVERSATION 9

• Coherence
• Cohesion
• Initiating and closing conversations
• Intervention
• Turn-taking

UNIT IV POWER STRUCTURE AND LANGUAGE USE 9

• Gender and language use
• Politeness expressions and their use
• Ethical dimensions of language use
• Language rights as part of human rights

UNIT V MEDIA AND PERSUASIVE COMMUNICATION 9

• Power of media, Orwell’s problem (Chomsky)
 • Manufacturing of opinion and hidden agendas.
• Fundamentals of persuasive communication.
• Persuasive quotient
• Politics and communication barrier.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able,

CO1: To improve their communicative competency across all skills of language.

CO2: To improve their writing ability in writing for persuasion and convincing someone.
CO3: To attend job interviews more confidently,
CO4: To improve social communication sensitive to gender and other prejudices.
CO5: To do better in the spoken component of the placement tasks

TEXT BOOK:
1. Stephen. C. Levenson, 1983, Pragmatics, Cambridge University Press

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Austin, 1962, J.L. How to do things with words. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Grice,
P.1989.
2. Studies in the way of words. Cambridge, M.A: Harvard University Press.
3. Chomsky, N.1966. Aspects of the theory of syntax, The MIT press, Cambridge.
4. Chomsky, N.2006. Language and Mind, Cambridge University Press.
5. Hymes. D.N. 1972, On communication competence in J.B. Pride and J.Holmes (ed),
Sociolinguistics, pp 269-293, London Penguin.
6. Gilbert, H.Harman, 1976. Psychological aspect of the theory of syntax in Journal of
Philosophy, page 75-87.
7. Stangley, J. 2007. Language in Context. Clarendon press, Oxford.
8. Shannon, 1942. A Mathematical Theory of Communication.
9. Searle, J.R. 1969. Speech acts: An essay in the philosophy of language. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 2

CO3 2 3 2

CO4 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEN2242 FUNDAMENTALS OF LINGUISTICS 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
• To introduce the students to Linguistics (the scientific study of language).
• To explore some basic issues and questions related to language such as what do we
know when we know a language,
• To discover the relation between language and brain, language and society,
• To understand how a child learns a language, how the languages of the world are
similar as well as different, how we can analyze language as a structure etc.
• To provide students to a brief outline of language studies in Indian and western
tradition and many applications of linguistics in different fields.

UNIT I DEFINING LANGUAGE 9

• What is language and where is language?

o Language is a means of communication, a social product
o Language is a cognitive ability, relation between language and brain
• Study of Language in Indian and western traditions

UNIT II AN INSIGHT INTO LINGUISTICS 9

• What is Linguistics and what is not Linguistics?

o Linguistics is not prescriptive grammar learnt in the school
o Linguistics is not learning of many languages
o Linguistics provides tools to analyze language structure scientifically

UNIT III FORM AND FUNCTION 9

• Levels of Language Analysis: Form and content

o Sound
o Word
o Sentence
o Meaning
• Similarities and differences of languages

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9

• Applications of Linguistics
o Natural Language Processing
o Clinical Linguistics
o Psycholinguistics etc.

UNIT V IMPACT ON CAREER 9

• Impact of linguistics on one’s career
 o An understanding of Linguistics for better use of language
o Language and personality development
o Linguistic features specific to Engineers.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able,

CO1: Understand what is linguistics

CO2: Explore some basic issues and questions related to language
CO3: Understand the subtle difference between the use of English in Indian and
western tradition.
CO4: Familiarize themselves with the unique features of language in technology
CO5: Understand the basics of how children acquire languages

TEXT BOOK:
1. Raj Kumar Sharma, 'Fundamentals of Linguistics', Atlantic Publishers, Chennai:2019.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas Herbst, 'English Linguistics: A coursebook for students of English', De Gruyter
Mouton Publication, Germany: 2010.
2. Victoria A. Fromkin (ed.), Linguistics: An introduction to linguistic theory, Blackwell
Publishers, USA: 2001.
3. Jeff Connor - Linto and Ralph W Fasold, 'An Introduction to Language and Linguistics’,
Cambridge University Press, 2014.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 2

CO3 2 3 2

CO4 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UHS2243 FILM APPRECIATION 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
• To introduce students to the development of film as an art and entertainment form.
• To discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over a century.
• To enable the students to read the script of a film and appreciate the various nuances.
• To enable students, understand the evolution of film industry from the past to present
• To guide the students to study films joyfully and appreciate all aspects of the film.

UNIT I THE COMPONENTS OF FILMS 9

• The material and equipment

• The story, screenplay and script
• The actors, crew members, and the director
• The process of filmmaking

UNIT II EVOLUTION OF FILM LANGUAGE 9

• Film language, form, movement etc.

• Early cinema - silent film (Particularly French)
• The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation Talkies
• Films and their influence on the language of people

UNIT III FILM APPRECIATION 9

• Realist theory; Auteurists

• Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
• How to read films?
• Film Criticism / Appreciation

UNIT IV DEVELOPMENT OF FILMS 9

• Representative Soviet films

• Representative Japanese films
• Representative Italian films
• Representative Hollywood film and the studio stem

UNIT V INDIAN FILMS 9

• The early era
• The important films made by the directors E-3: The regional films
• The documentaries in India
• The Indian Film Industry and the Hollywood
• The impact of Films on students in India.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to understand

CO1: the process of the development of film as an art and entertainment form.
CO2: the evolution of the language of cinema as it evolved over a century.
CO3: the script writing techniques of a film and appreciate the various nuances.
CO4: the evolution of film industry from the past to present
CO5: how to appreciate all aspects of the film.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Jim Piper, ‘The Film Appreciation Book’: The Film Course You Always Wanted to
Take, Allworth Press, New York: 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stanley Cavell, ‘The World Viewed: Reflections on the Ontology of Film, Enlarged
Edition’, Harvard University Press, 1979.
2. Joseph M. Boggs, Dennis W. Petrie, ‘The Art of Watching Films’, McGraw – Hill,
2006.
3. Bernard F. Dick, ‘Anatomy of Film’, St. Martins Press, 1990.
4. Understanding the Film: An Introduction to Film Appreciation by Jan Bone and Ron
Johnson

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 2

CO3 2 3 2

CO4 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UHS2241 HUMAN RELATIONS AT WORK 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
The course aims at making the students:

• aware of human relations at work and its relationship with self.

• aware of the processes involved in interaction with people at work.
• understand the importance of psychological and physical health in maintaining human
relations at work and progressing in career.
• Understand the ways and means to improve human relations at work.
• Realize the importance of safeguarding themselves from any exploitation.

UNIT I HUMAN RELATIONS 9

• Understanding and Managing Yourself

• Human Relations and You
• Self-Esteem and Self Confidence
• Self-Motivation and Goal Setting
• Emotional Intelligence
• Attitudes and Happiness
• Values and Ethics and Problem Solving and Creativity.

UNIT II INTERPERSONAL RELATIONSHIP 9

• Dealing Effectively with People

• Communication in the Workplace
• Specialized Tactics for Getting Along with Others in the Workplace
• Managing Conflict; Becoming an Effective Leader
• Motivating Others and Developing Teamwork
• Diversity and Cross-Cultural Competence

UNIT III HEALTHY LIVING 9

• Staying Physically Healthy

• Yoga, Pranayama
• Exercise: Aerobic and anaerobic.

UNIT IV MENTAL WELL BEING 9

• Staying Psychologically Healthy

• Managing Stress and Personal Problems
• Meditation.
UNIT V CAREER READINESS 9

• Developing Career Thrust

• Getting Ahead in Your Career
• Learning Strategies
• Perception
• Life Span Changes
• Developing Good Work Habits.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student

CO1: will enhance their awareness about human relations at work and its relationship
with self.
CO2: become aware of the processes involved in interaction with people at work.
CO3: Will understand the importance of psychological and physical
health in maintaining human relations at work.
CO4: will be able to understand the ways and means to improve human relations at
work.
CO5: will realize the importance of safeguarding themselves from any
exploitation.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dubrien, A. J. (2017). Human Relations for Career and Personal Success: Concepts,
Applications, and Skills, 11th Ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Greenberg, J. S. (2017). Comprehensive stress management (14th edition). New York:
McGraw Hill.
2. Udai, Y. (2015). Yogasanaurpranayam. New Delhi: N.S. Publications.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 3 2 2

CO2 2 2 3 2 2

CO3 2 2 3 2 2

CO4 2 2 3 2 2

CO5 2 2 3 2 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
APPLICATIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY IN
UHS2242 2 0 2 3
EVERYDAY LIFE

OBJECTIVES
The objectives of this course are to make students:
• aware of the different applications of psychology to everyday issues of life,
• aware of the different social issues, workplace issues, and behavioral issues, and
• understand how the knowledge gained from this course can be used in their own
personal and professional work life.
• Understand the psychological principles relevant to human development.
• Understand the impact of Psychology on human life

UNIT I PSYCHOLOGY OF AN INDIVIDUAL 9

• Introduction: Nature and fields.

• The individual human being and his or her experiences, mental processes and behaviors.

UNIT II DIFFERENT TYPES OF PSYCHOLOGY 9

• Psychology in industries and organizations: Job analysis; fatigue and

accidents; consumer behavior.
• Different types of psychology: cognitive, forensic, social, and
developmental psychology

UNIT III PSYCHOLOGY AND MENTAL HEALTH 9

• Psychology and mental health: Abnormality, symptoms and causes psychological

disorders.
• Psychology for better decision making, stress management and behavior.

UNIT IV COUNSELING 9

• Psychology and Counseling: Need of Counseling, Counselor and the

Counselee, Counseling Process, Areas of Counseling.

UNIT V SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 9

• Psychology and social behaviour: Group, group dynamics, team

building, Prejudice and stereotypes; Effective Communication,
conflict and negotiation.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: raise their awareness on applications of psychology to everyday issues of life,

CO2: deal more efficiently with different issues in society, workplace and human
behavior.
CO3: Apply principles of psychology in their own personal and professional lives.
CO4: Use the psychological principles for their own human development.
CO5: Appreciate the impact of Psychology on human life

TEXT BOOK:
1. Schultz, D. & Schultz, S.E. (2009). Psychology and Work Today (10th ed.). New Jersey:
Pearson/Prentice Hall.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Butcher, J. N., Mineka, S., & Hooley, J. M. (2010). Abnormal psychology (14th ed.).New
York: Pearson
2. Gladding, S. T. (2014). Counselling: A comprehensive profession. New Delhi:
Pearson Education
3. Aronson, E., Wilson, T. D., &Akert, R. M. (2010). Social Psychology (7th Ed.).
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 3 2 2

CO2 2 2 3 2 2

CO3 2 2 3 2 2

CO4 2 2 3 2 2

CO5 2 2 3 2 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UNDERSTANDING SOCIETY AND
UEN2243 CULTURE THROUGH LITERATURE 2 0 2 3

OBJECTIVES
• To acquire skills not only the ones necessary for one’s “trade”, but also the ones to
acquire knowledge and become a better human being, as a means towards the end of
creating a better society.
 • To facilitate understanding a society, its people, their mind, prevalent traditions and
culture with a view to developing a holistic worldview, which is essential for a
sustainable society.
• To felicitate self-reflection and deeper understanding of oneself.
• To introduce students to literary works of various countries/ regions / societies and
attempt to understand the respective traditions to which the works belong.
• To understand the relationship between life and literature

UNIT I LITERATURE AND LIFE 9

• Traditional Knowledge.
• what is Literature?
• Significance of studying literature,
• Studying society and culture through literature,
• Understanding morality through literature.
• Reading of Literary texts – The literary piece will be given to students beforehand
so that they read it and become familiar with the texts before coming to the class. In
the class, the text will be read once again, where doubts if any will be cleared.
• First Discussion – The reading will be followed by a discussion where the text will be
analyzed in detail. The students will be encouraged to share their interpretation of the
text.

UNIT II RESOLVING DILEMMA 9

• Definition and Description of ‘Dilemma’

• Choice of literary texts to confront situations where one is faced with a dilemma
(differentiating what is right and wrong? and develop a deeper insight into the various
realities of life.
 Presentation of analysis of the literary text (The students will keep in mind the
author’s background and the socio-historical and cultural backgrounds while
preparing this presentation)

 Q&A Session on the Presentation (the students will be encouraged to ask questions
to their respective classmates regarding the presentation/ analysis initiating a second
discussion on the text.

UNIT III GENDER STUDIES 9

• Literary pieces that question the current notions of gender, and raises uncomfortable
questions,
• Literature that challenges the status quo, forcing us to think about the real meaning of
equality and emancipation
• Second Discussion – (Having made their presentation, and heard the presentations made
by their classmates, the students would now have a fairly good idea of the various nuances
of the text, making it a ripe moment to have the second detailed discussion on the text.
Here the teacher may refer to those points which may have been missed by the students.)
UNIT IV READING LITERATURE 9
• Reading of select Literary works
• The author’s Background, Historical and Social Background for a better understanding
of the literary work
• Study of other significant study material as required for an overall understanding of the
literary work.

UNIT V SUBMISSION OF A REPORT 9

• Submission of a report – Having faced questions from their classmates, and after
having a second discussion on the text, the student would come across new ideas
which will be incorporated into the analysis and submitted in the form of a report.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
CO1: Improvement in the awareness of various traditions.
CO2: Not only understand not just the diversity found between various traditions but also
celebrate them.
CO3: strengthen their analytical capability.
CO4: improve their language skills and also the ability to express complex ideas.
CO5: understand the relationship between life and literature

REFERENCES:
1. Literary works will be provided by the teacher.
2. Author’s Background, Historical and Social Background which are significant for a
better understanding of the work will be provided by the teacher.
3. Reference materials or other significant study material as required for an overall
understanding of the literary work will be sourced out by the students in consultation
with the teacher

CO – PO/PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 2

CO3 2 3 2

CO4 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 2
 MANAGEMENT ELECTIVES
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UBA 2541 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
• Sketch the Evolution of Management.
• Extract the functions and principles of management.
• Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
• Study the various HR related activities.
• Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career planning
and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership –
Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control and
performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
 CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th
Edition, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert Kreitner and Mamata Mohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”,
Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.

CO – PO MAPPING

Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1

CO2 2 3 1

CO3 2 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 1

CO5 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UBA 2542 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
• Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus,
TQM framework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
• Explain the TQM Principles for application.
• Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking
and FMEA.
• Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply Techniques
like QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
• Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of
product and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM –-Gurus of TQM
(Brief introduction) -- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints,
Service Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal--
Continuous process improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier
partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process
CapabilityBench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using
the findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages:
Design FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—
ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of
EMS.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking and FMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and
apply QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna, Glen H. Bester field, MaryB. Sacre, Hemant
Urdhwareshe and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education
Asia, Revised Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
 3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition, 2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2006

CO – PO MAPPING

Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO
10 11 12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 1 1

CO3 2 3 1 1 1

CO4 3 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 2 1 1 1

COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
WORK ETHICS, CORPORATE SOCIAL
UBA 2543 RESPONSIBILITY AND GOVERNANCE 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the value of professional practices with code of conduct and ethical values
• Discuss the various outlooks of roles and responsibilities with work ethics.
• Introduce the Indian constitutional statutes for ethical practices by citizens
• Analyze the ethical commitments to be hold by industry with protecting environment
• Insist on corporate and social responsibilities through Governance practices and
regulation

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Ethics - Definition & nature, Characteristics, Attributes of Ethics - Business Ethics; Ethical
theories; Causes of unethical behavior; Ethical abuses; Work ethics; Code of conduct; Public
good.

UNIT II ETHICS THEORY AND BEYOND 9

Management of Ethics - Ethics analysis [ Hosmer model ]; Ethical dilemma; Ethics in practice –
ethics for managers; Role and function of ethical managers- Comparative ethical behaviour of
managers; Code of ethics; Competitiveness, organizational size, profitability and ethics; Cost of
ethics in Corporate ethics evaluation.

UNIT III LEGAL ASPECTS OF ETHICS 9

Political – legal environment; Provisions of the Indian constitution pertaining to Business;
Political setup – major characteristics and their implications for business; Prominent features of
MRTP & FERA. Social – cultural environment and their impact on business operations, Salient
features of Indian culture and values.

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS 9

Economic Environment; Philosophy of economic grow and its implications for business, Main
features of Economic Planning with respect to business; Industrial policy and framework of
government contract over Business; Role of chamber of commerce and confederation of Indian
Industries.

UNIT V CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND GOVERNANCE 9

Definition- Evolution- Need for CSR; Theoretical perspectives; Corporate citizenship; Business
practices; Strategies for CSR; Challenges and implementation; Evolution of corporate governance;
Governance practices and regulation; Structure and development of boards; Role of capital market
and government; Governance ratings; Future of governance- innovative practices; Case studies with
lessons learnt.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand ethical issues in workplace and have good practices in professional duties.
CO2: Learn roles and responsibilities in professional career as a team worker
CO3: Understand the legal aspects in Indian constitutional for protection of societal values
CO4: Analyze the economical development by industry with importance to environment
protection.
CO5: Understand need of good Governance in a corporate with ethical organizational
behavior.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.A. Sherlekar, Ethics in Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2009.
2. William B. Werther and David B. Chandler, Strategic corporate social responsibility, Sage
Publications Inc., 2011
3. VVRobert A.G. Monks and Nell Minow, Corporate governance, John Wiley and Sons,
2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
5. VW.H. Shaw, Business Ethics, Cengage Learning, 2007.
6. Beeslory, Michel and Evens, Corporate Social Responsibility, Taylor and Francis, 1978.
7. Philip Kotler and Nancy Lee, Corporate social responsibility: doing the most good for
company and your cause, Wiley, 2005.
8. Subhabrata Bobby Banerjee, Corporate social responsibility: the good, the bad and the
ugly, Edward Elgar Publishing, 2007.
9. Satheesh kumar, Corporate governance, Oxford University, Press, 2010.
10. Bob Tricker, Corporate governance- Principles, policies and practices, Oxford University
Press, 2009
11. Larue Tone Hosmer and Richard D., The Ethics of Management, Irwin Inc., 1995.
12. Joseph A. Petrick and John F. Quinn, Management Ethics - integrity at work, Sage, 1997.
CO – PO MAPPING

Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO
10 11 12

CO1 3 1 1 2

CO2 3 1 1 2

CO3 3 2 3 1 1 2

CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2

CO5 3 1 1 2 2
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2521 INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
Information theory and coding are the two load-bearing pillars of modern digital communication
systems. Its purpose is to determine the ultimate data compression and ultimate transmission rate,
when transferring the information from one end to the other. It is a subset of communication theory.
This course finds applications in a variety of fields like economics, probability, Computer Science
and Physics.

OBJECTIVES
• To know the basic principles and understanding of information measure and channel.
• To gain the conceptual understanding of various source coding techniques.
• To develop an understanding of Rate distortion theory and Scalar Quantization

UNIT I INFORMATION MEASURE 9

Introduction to information theory – Definition of information measure and entropy – Entropy,
relative entropy and mutual Information – Properties of joint and conditional information measures
a-Markov source - Problem solving in entropy.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO SOURCE CODING 9

Block code and its properties – Instantaneous code and its properties – Non Singular codes, Prefix
codes, Uniquely Decodable codes, Kraft-McMillan Equality and compact codes – Shannon’s first
theorem. Coding Strategies, Huffman Coding and Proof of its Optimality.

UNIT III CODING TECHNIQUES 9

Source coding techniques: Non- Binary Huffman Code, Golomb codes, Tunstell codes, Adaptive
Huffman Coding, Shannon- Fano – Elias Coding, Arithmetic code – Lempel Ziv code,
.
UNIT IV INFORMATION CHANNEL 9
Introduction to information channel –Properties of Different Information Channel – Reduction of
Information Channel- Introduction to Channel capacity – Binary symmetric channel – Binary
erasure channel, Calculation of channel capacity for different information channel – Z channel,
Noisy Channel, Noiseless Channel, Typewriter Channel, Uniform channel.

UNIT V RATE DISTORTION THEORY 9

Introduction to Rate-Distortion Theory – Definition and Properties of Rate-Distortion Functions,
Calculation of Rate-Distortion Functions, Introduction to quantization – Lloyd-Max Quantizer,
Companded Quantization.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Measure the performance of the information over a channel.

CO2: Design and implement various coding techniques in communication systems.
CO3: Analyze the information capacity of different types of channel
 CO4: Analyze the Rate Distortion functions and features of different Quantizers.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cover T M and Thomas J A, Elements of Information Theory, John Wiley & Sons, 1991.
(Unit – I & II, IV & V)
2. Khalid Syaood, Introduction to Data Compression, Elsevier, 2012. (Unit III & V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Yeung R W, A First Course in Information Theory, Kluwer Academic, 2002.
2. Ranjan Bose, ITC and Cryptography, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, Second Edition, 2007.
3. Muralidhar Kulkarni and Shivaprakasha K.S, Information Theory and Coding, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
4. Morelos-Zaragoza R H, The Art of Error Correcting Coding, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
5. Sklar B, Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications, Pearson Education,
Second Edition, 2009

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

.
Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL
UEC2522 3 0 0 3
PROCESSING

PREAMBLE
Advanced digital signal processing course begin with an introduction to discrete time random
process and includes theoretical and design aspects of spectrum estimation, linear prediction and
adaptive filtering techniques. This course also introduces compressed sensing used for signal
processing applications This course require the knowledge of discrete time signals, systems and
signal processing as a prerequisite.

OBJECTIVES
• To introduce the basics of discrete time random signal processing
• To learn the concept of signal modeling, estimation and prediction theory
• To know about linear and adaptive filtering and its applications
• To understand the spectrum estimation techniques
• To learn the concepts of compressed sensing
UNIT I DISCRETE TIME RANDOM PROCESSES 9
Review of Discrete Stochastic Processes - Stationary processes, Autocorrelation, Autocovariance,
Parseval’s theorem, Wiener-Khinchine relation, White noise, Power Spectral Density, Spectral
factorization, Filtering Random Processes.

UNIT II SPECTRAL ESTIMATION 9

Nonparametric methods of spectrum estimation - Periodogram, Modified periodogram, Bartlett,
Welch and Blackman Tukey methods, Performance Comparison, Parametric methods - Special
types of Random Processes – MA, AR, ARMA – Yule-Walker equations and spectral estimation.

UNIT III SIGNAL MODELING AND LINEAR PREDICTION 9

Least square method, Prony’s pole-zero model – Prony’s all pole model, Iterative Prefiltering,
Finite Data Records – Linear Prediction of Signals -The Autocorrelation and Covariance Method,
Levinson Durbin Algorithm, Forward and Backward Predictions.

UNIT IV OPTIMUM FILTERS 9

Linear Minimum Mean - Square Error (LMMSE) Filtering, Wiener Hopf Equation, FIR Wiener
filter, Noise Cancellation Application, Causal and Noncausal IIR Wiener filter, Discrete Kalman
Filter.

UNIT V COMPRESSED SENSING 9

Traditional Sampling system and its drawback- Compressed sensing process - Mathematical
background- Sparse filtering - Signal Representation: Basis vectors -Restricted Isometric Property-
Coherence- Stable recovery- Number of measurements- Sensing matrix-Sparse Recovery
Algorithms: Basis Pursuit algorithm- L1 minimization- Matching pursuit- Orthogonal Matching
Pursuit (OMP).

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Acquire knowledge on power spectral density and apply to discrete time random
signals and systems
CO2: Analyze non-parametric and parametric methods for spectrum estimation
CO3: Analyze signal modelling techniques to discrete time random process
CO4: Apply linear estimation and prediction techniques to discrete random signals for signal
separation, detection and estimation
CO5: Apply optimum filtering techniques for discrete random signals
CO6: Apply the concepts of compressed sensing for signal processing applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Monson H. Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2002D.Roody, J.Coolen, ―Electronic Communications, PHI, Fourth
Edition, 2006. (Unit I to IV)
2. Radha Sankararajan, Hemalatha Rajendran and Aasha Nandhini Sukumaran,
Compressive Sensing for Wireless Communication: Challenges and Opportunities, River
Publications, 2016. (Unit V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications, Pearson Education India; Fourth Edition, 2007.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra, Fundamentals Digital Signal Processing: A Computer - Based Approach,
McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
3. Dimitris G. Manolakis and Vinay K.Ingle, Applied Digital Signal Processing, Cambridge
University Press, 2011.
4. John G. Proakis, Charles Rader, Fuyun Ling Marc.S.Moonen, Ian Proudler and
C.L.Nikias, Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, First Edition,
2002.
5. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson, Fourth Edition,
2017.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Course Program Outcomes
Outcomes
Outcome
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 1 3 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND
UEC2523 3 0 0 3
ORGANIZATION

OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer
• To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and floating point
arithmetic unit
• To learn the basics of pipelined execution
• To understand the memory hierarchies, cache and virtual memories and communication
with I/O devices
• To understand parallelism and multi-core processors.

UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9

Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance; Instructions: Language of the
computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation; Logical operations – Decision
making; MIPS addressing.
UNIT II ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9
Addition and subtraction; Multiplication; Division; Floating Point Representation: Floating point
operations.

UNIT III PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9

A Basic MIPS implementation: Building a datapath – Control implementation scheme; Pipelining:
Pipelined datapath and control – Handling data hazards & Control hazards – Exceptions – Issues in
predictive branching: Spectre and Meltdown.

UNIT IV MEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9

Memory Hierarchy; Memory technologies; Cache Memory: Basics and cache mapping techniques;
Measuring and improving cache performance; Virtual Memory: TLBs; Accessing I/O devices –
Interrupts; Direct memory access; Bus structure – Bus operation – Arbitration; Interface circuits;
USB.

UNIT V PARALLEL PROCESSORS 9

Parallel processing challenges; Flynn's classification: SISD – MIMD – SIMD – SPMD and Vector
Architectures; Hardware multithreading; Multi-core processors and other shared memory
multiprocessors; Introduction to Graphics Processing Units.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions (K2).
CO2: Design arithmetic and logic unit (K3).
CO3: Explain pipelined execution and design its control unit (K3)
CO4: Design of various memory systems and understand I/O communication (K3)
CO5: Explain parallel processing architectures (K2)
CO6: Design a multi-functional ALU as per the requirement in teams by applying best practices
of system design (K3)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A Patterson, John L Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, 5th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, Naraig Manjikian, Computer Organization
and Embedded Systems, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance,
8th Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. John P Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2012.
3. John L Hennessey, David A Patterson, Architecture – A Quantitative Approach, 5th edition,
Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2012 (Units I, III).
4. Morris Mano M, Computer System Architecture, Revised 3rd Edition, Pearson Publication,
2017.
5. Chakraborty P, Computer Architecture and Organization, JAICO Publishing House, 2010.
6. https://www.techrepublic.com/article/spectre-and-meltdown-explained-a-comprehensive-
guide-for-professionals/
 7. https://arxiv.org/pdf/1807.07940.pdf (Spectre Attack)
8. https://meltdownattack.com/meltdown.pdf.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 2 2
CO2 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO3 2 2 3 2
CO4 2 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 2 2
CO6 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2524 MEMS AND NEMS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
The MEMS and NEMS market has been tremendously developing in the device fabrication. The
corresponding technology has quickly spread across various scales of application. A variety of
MEMS/NEMS devices have been developed and some of them including accelerometers, pressure
sensors, gyroscopes, microphones, and optical mirror displays have been proven commercially
successful. This course provides the knowledge about MEMS and NEMS concepts, fabrication,
devices, and its packaging.

OBJECTIVES
• To understand the concepts of micro electromechanical devices and quantum mechanics
• To learn the fabrication process of Microsystems.
• To understand the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators.
• To understand the packaging and characterization of MEMS/NEMS

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS 9

MEMS and Microsystem, Microsystem and microelectronics, Applications of MEMS, Materials
for MEMS: Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals.
Introduction to NEMS, Nano scaling, classification of nano structured materials, Applications of
nanomaterials.
UNIT II FABRICATION OF MEMS AND NEMS 9
Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation. Thin film depositions: LPCVD,
Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching techniques: Dry and wet etching;
Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.

UNIT III MICRO AND NANO SENSORS 9

Acoustic sensor – Quartz crystal microbalance, Surface acoustic wave, Flexural plate wave, shear
horizontal; Vibratory gyroscope, Pressure sensors, Quantum well infrared photodetectors.

UNIT IV MICRO AND NANO ACTUATORS 9

Electrostatic actuators, piezoelectric actuators, Thermal actuators, Actuators using shape memory
alloys, Microgrippers, Micromotors, Microvalves, Micropumps.

UNIT V PACKAGING AND CHARACTERIZATION OF MEMS AND NEMS 9

Micro / nano systems packaging, Essential packaging technologies, Selection of packaging
materials; Nano material characterization - XRD, SEM, TEM, AFM, STM.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Familiarize the basics of micro/nano electromechanical structures, devices and systems
including their theoretical foundations, applications and advantages
CO2: Recognize the use of materials in micro/nano fabrication and describe the fabrication
processes including surface micromachining, bulk micromachining and LIGA
CO3: Analyze the key performance aspects of micro/nano electromechanical transducers
including sensors and actuators
CO4: Explore the techniques for characterization and packaging requirements of
MEMS/NEMS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
(Unit I to V)
2. Murty B.S, Shankar P, Raj B, Rath, B.B, Murday J, Textbook of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, Springer publishing, 2013. (Unit I, III & V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and Structures”, CRC
Press, 2002
2. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson education India limited, 2006
3. Vinod Kumar Khanna Nanosensors: Physical, Chemical, and Biological, CRC press,
2012.
4. Mahalik N P, MEMS, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. Manouchehr E Motamedi, MOEMS: Micro-Opto-Electro-Mechanical Systems, SPIE
press, First Edition, 2005.
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING
Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 2

CO2 1 1 3 3 1 1 2

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 2

CO4 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

INTRODUCTION TO RADAR AND
UEC2621 3 0 0 3
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION

PREAMBLE
Radar and satellite communication play a vital role in the fields of space communication, telephone
and GPS systems etc., The processing and analysis of radar and satellite signals are essential for
processing and application. The various types of radar and segments of satellite systems and their
performance are important. This course provides the basic knowledge required for fundamentals of
radar and satellite systems.

OBJECTIVES

• To understand the operation of radar systems for a variety of applications

• To learn various types of radars and their principles of operation.
• To Study the satellite orbits and earth segments in satellite communication
• To understand the space segment of satellite system
• To understand various multiple access schemes in satellite and its applications

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF RADAR AND RADAR EQUATION 9

Nature of Radar - Simple form of Radar Equation, Radar Operation, Radar Frequencies and
Applications. Radar Equation - Minimum Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise, SNR, Envelope
Detector — Integration of Radar Pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets Transmitter Power, PRF
and Range Ambiguities, System Losses.

UNIT II TYPES OF RADAR SYSTEMS 9

Doppler Effect, CW Radar — Block Diagram, Applications of CW radar, FM-CW Radar -Range
and Doppler Measurement, Block Diagram and Characteristics, Block diagram of MTI and Pulse
Doppler radar, Tracking Radar - Monopulse Tracking Radar — Amplitude Comparison
Monopulse, Phase Comparison Monopulse. Comparison of trackers, tracking with Surveillance
radar.

UNIT III SATELLITE ORBITS AND EARTH SEGMENT 9

Kepler’s Laws, Newton’s Law, Orbital parameters, Satellite orbits – Low earth, Medium earth,
High earth Orbits, polar, inclined , geosynchronous orbits, Transfer Orbit. Earth Segment - Receiver
only home TV system, Master antenna TV system, Community Antenna TV system, Transmit –
Receiver earth station,

UNIT IV SPACE SEGMENT 9

Power Supply, Altitude Control – Spinning Satellite stabilization and momentum wheel
stabilization, Station keeping, thermal control, TTC subsystems, Transponders – the wideband
receiver, input demultiplexer, power amplifier, , Antenna subsystem, Advanced Tiros – N
Spacecraft.

UNIT V SATELLITE ACCESS AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Satellite Access - Single Access, Pre and demand assigned FDMA, SPADE system, TDMA, Pre
and demand assigned TDMA, Satellite switched TDMA, CDMA, Satellite Applications -
INTELSAT Series, INSAT, VSAT, GPS, Global Navigation Satellite Systems - Basic concepts of
GPS. GPS constellation, Interdisciplinary application.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Acquire knowledge on the fundamentals of radar systems.

CO2: Analyse various types of radars and its operational functions.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the fundamentals of satellite orbits and earth segment
CO4: Interpret the multiple access schemes for satellite communication.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Merrill L Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, TMH Special Indian Edition, Second
Edition, 2007(Units I & II)
2. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw-Hill International, Third Edition,
2006(Units III - V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mark A Rkhards, James A Scheer, William A HoIm. Yesdee, Principles of Modem Radar:
Basic Principles, 2013.
2. Byron Edde, Radar Principles, Technology Applications, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Wilbur L Pritchard, Hendri G Suyderhoud, Robert A Nelson, Satellite Communication
Systems Engineering, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
4. Madhavendra Richharia, Satellite systems for personal Applications, John Wiley and Sons,
Ltd.
5. Mohinder S Grewal, Lawerence R, Weill, Angus P Andrews, Global Positioning Systems,
Inertial Navigation, and Integration. 2nd Edition, A John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Publication,
2007.
CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING
Program Specific
Course Program Outcomes
Outcomes
Outcom
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
es
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1
 CO4 2 2 3 1 1 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO
UEC2622 3 0 0 3
PROCESSING

PREAMBLE
This course covers the fundamental concepts and principles of image and video processing. Digital
images and videos find applications in the many fields such as astronomical, bio-medical,
consumer, industry etc. in everyday life. The processing of image and video signals is therefore
very important for software developers, and practicing engineers. Students will also get an
opportunity to implement the algorithms that are specific to real time image and video processing
systems/applications.

OBJECTIVES
• To mathematically present the image representation and processing concepts
• To understand the effect of image transforms
• To perform digital manipulation of images using morphology.
• To understand video segmentation process
• To understand methods of objects in video signals

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Image Acquisition, Color Images -RGB, HIS, HSV YUV and YCbCr Color representations, Point
Processing, Neighbourhood Processing; Image Transforms – KL, DCT, Continuous and Discrete
Wavelet Transform

UNIT II GEOMETRIC TRANSFORMATIONS AND VISUAL EFFECTS 9

Affine, Translation, Scaling, Rotation, Shearing Transformations, Backward Mapping,
Interpolation, Homography, Visual Effects, Visual Effects Based on Pixel Manipulation and
Geometric Transformations

UNIT III MORPHOLOGY AND BLOB ANALYSIS 9

Hit and Fit, Dilation and Erosion, Closing and Opening operations, Boundary Detection, BLOB
Extraction: The Recursive and Sequential Grass-Fire Algorithm, BLOB Features, BLOB
Classification

UNIT IV IMAGE AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9

Image Compression in the Transform Domain, JPEG, Zero -tree Coding, JPEG 2000, Basics of
Video compression: MPEG -1, MPEG -2, MPEG -7, and H.264 standards.

UNIT V VIDEO SEGMENTATION AND TRACKING 9

Video Acquisition, Change Detection Algorithm, Background Subtraction, Threshold Value, Image
Differencing Tracking-by-Detection, Prediction, Tracking Multiple Objects, Applications of
Video Processing Systems - Edutainment Game, Coin Sorting Using a Robot.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Extract images for better understanding of the color information

CO2: Apply transformation on images to develop further understanding
CO3: Apply morphology techniques and BLOB detection
CO4: Apply algorithms for segmentation in video
CO5: Solve object tracking in video

TEXT BOOKS:

1. T.B. Moeslund, Introduction to Video and Image Processing, Springer-Verlag, 2012

(Unit I - III and Unit V)
2. K. S. Thyagarajan, Still image and video compression with MATLAB, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc.2011. (Unit I and Unit -IV)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Yaquin Zhang, Video processing and communication, PHI,
First Edition.
2. Alberto S. Aguado and Mark S. Nixon, Feature extraction and image processing,Academic
Press, Third Edition, 2012.
3. Ranjan Parekh, Fundamentals of IMAGE, AUDIO, and VIDEO PROCESSING Using
MATLAB® With Applications To Pattern Recognition, CRC Press, 2021
4. Rama Chellappa, Sergios Theodoridis, Image and Video Processing and Analysis and
Computer Vision Academic Press Library in Signal Processing, Volume 6,2017

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2623 ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
Design and development of application specific-electronic systems requires deeper
understandings of architectures of various embedded processors. The efficient choice of processor
can be done with the exploration of the salient features of the processors. This course provides the
basic understanding of the different kinds of embedded processors and its architectural features.

OBJECTIVES
• To familiarize the features, specification of RISC architectures
• To gain knowledge on the enriched instruction set of ARM processor
• To familiarize the features, specification of modern microcontrollers
• To gain knowledge on the 32 bit microcontrollers based ARM architectures

UNIT I RISC ARCHITECTURES 9

Evolution of Embedded Architectures – CISC vs RISC – The RISC Design Philosophy – The ARM
Design Philosophy – Embedded system hardware – Embedded system software, ARM processor
fundamentals – Registers – CPSR – Pipeline - Exceptions, Interrupts and the Vector table – Core
Extensions – Architecture Revisions – ARM processor families.

UNIT II ARM INSTRUCTION SET 9

Data processing instructions – Branch Instructions – Load-store instructions – Software interrupt
instruction – Program status register instructions – Loading constants – Conditional execution,
THUMB register usage – ARM-Thumb interworking – Data processing instructions – Load-store
instructions – Stack instructions – Software interrupt instruction.

UNIT III ARM CORTEX PROCESSORS 9

Introduction to the Cortex-M Processor Family - ARM 'Cortex-M3' architecture for
microcontrollers – Thumb 2 instruction technology – Internal Registers - Nested Vectored Interrupt
controller - Memory map - Interrupts and exception handling – Applications of Cortex- M3
architecture

UNIT IV ARM CORTEX IMPLEMENTATION 9

The pipeline – Detailed block diagram – Bus interfaces- Other interface – The External PPB – Reset
types and Reset signals, Cortex-M3 Programming – Overview – A Typical development flow –
Using C – CMSIS –Using Assembly – Using Exclusive Access for semaphores – Using bit band
for semaphores

UNIT V MSP430 MICROCONTROLLERS 9

Functional Block diagram of MSP430F2003 - Memory Mapped CPU, Exceptions, Architecture of
MSP430 - Processor Addressing Modes - Instruction Set, Interrupts, Digital in-outs, Timer,
Communication interfaces.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1 : Summarize the key features of RISC architecture

CO2 : Comprehend the enriched instruction set of ARM processor
CO3 : Summarize the architectural features of ARM Cortex M processor
CO4 : Implement the salient features of ARM Cortex M Processor in embedded system
design and development
CO5 : Summarize the architectural features of MSP 430 Microcontrollers

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, ARM system Developer’s Guide,
Designing and optimizing system software, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2004. (UNIT-I,
II)
2. Joseph Yiu, The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3, Newnes, 2010. (UNIT-III, IV)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John H Davies, MSP430 Microcontroller Basics, Elsevier, 2008. (UNIT-V)
2. Steve Furber, ARM System – On – Chip architecture, Addision Wesley, 2000
3. Yifeng Zhu, Embedded Systems with Arm Cortex-M Microcontrollers in Assembly
Language and C, E-Man Press LLC; 3rd edition, July 2017.
4. Trevor Martin, The Designers Guide to the Cortex-M Processor Family, Newnes,2013.
5. Manuel Jimenez, Rogelio Palomera and Isidoro Convertier, Introduction to Embedded
systems using Microcontrollers and the MSP430, Springer 2014.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2624 NANOELECTRONICS 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE: Nano electronics plays an important role in miniaturization of electronic devices.

It is the emerging area of electronics dealing with nanometer sized devices used for electronic
circuits and systems. Nano electronics is the most advanced of the Nanotechnologies and products
using the Nano electronics are appearing in the market. It provides ultra-low power consumption
with increased features and functionalities. Current technology developments hugely support the
fabrication and testing of Nano devices.
OBJECTIVES

• To understand the concepts of Nano electronics

• To know the basics of quantum electronics.
• To know the basic concepts of Nano electronics transistors, tunneling devices and
superconducting devices.
• To understand the basics of nanotube devices.

UNIT I ELECTRONICS TO NANO ELECTRONICS 9

Scaling to nano-Light as a wave and particle- Electrons as waves and particles- origin of quantum
mechanics-General postulates of quantum mechanics-Time independent Schrodinger wave
equation- Electron confinement-Quantum dots, wires and well-Spin and angular momentum-Wave
packets and uncertainty.
UNIT II QUANTUM ELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Quantum electronic devices-Short channel MOS transistor-Split gate transistor-Electron wave

transistor-Electron wave transistor- Electron spin transistor-Quantum cellular automata-Quantum
dot array.
UNIT III NANO ELECTRONIC TRANSISTORS 9
Coulomb blockade-Coulomb blockade in Nano capacitors - Coulomb blockade in tunnel junctions-
Single electron transistors, Logic and memory circuits, Semiconductor nanowire FETs and SETs,
Molecular SETs and molecular electronics-
UNIT IV NANO ELECTRONIC TUNNELING AND SUPERCONDUCTING DEVICES 9

Tunnel effect-Tunneling element-Tunneling diode-Resonant tunneling diode-Three terminal

resonant tunneling devices- Digital circuit design based on RTDs- Superconducting switching
devices- Cryotron- Josephson tunneling device.
UNIT V BIOELECTRONICS AND MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS 9

Bioelectronics, DNA Analyzer as Biochip, Molecular Electronics, Carbon Nanotubes- Fullerenes,

Switches based on Fullerenes and Nanotubes, Polymer Electronic, Self-Assembling Circuits
,Optical Molecular Memories
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES

On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Familiarize the basics of nano electronics including quantum wires, dots and wells.
CO2: Comprehend the mechanism behind quantum electronic devices.
CO3: Analyze the key performance aspects of tunneling and superconducting nano electronic
devices.
CO4: Explore the development of nanotubes and nanostructure devices.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Pearson education, 2009. (Unit I & III)
2. Jan Dienstuhl, Karl Goser, and Peter Glösekötter, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From
Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices”, Springer-Verlag, 2004. (Unit II, IV & V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mircea Dragoman, Daniela Dragoman, Nanoelectronics: Principles and Devices, Artech

House, 2009.
2. Robert Puers, Livio Baldi, Marcel Van de Voorde, Sebastiaan E. van Nooten,
Nanoelectronics: Materials, Devices, Applications, Wiley, 2017.
3. Brajesh Kumar Kaushik, Nanoelectronics: Devices, Circuits and Systems, Elsevier science,
2018.
4. S. Datta,Lessons from Nanoelectronics: A New Perspective on Transport (Lessons from
Nanoscience: a Lecture Notes Series) World Scientific, 2012
5. V. Mitin, V. Kochelap, and M. Stroscio, Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science,
Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING
Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 2

CO2 3 2 2 3 0 3 0 1 1 0 1 0 2 1 3

CO3 3 2 2 3 0 3 0 1 2 0 0 0 2 1 3

CO4 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 3 1 3
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2721 UNDERWATER ACOUSTIC SYSTEM 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
Underwater Communication plays a vital role in the fields of communication in ocean/sea like
signal transmission in space. Signals are mostly acoustic based in nature and hence good
understanding about the acoustic communication is essential. Various types of noises that affect the
signal in the ocean and the sensors used for recording underwater signals are essential to study.
This course provides the basic knowledge required for further processing and analysis of signals
and systems for any application in underwater.

OBJECTIVES

• To understand the properties of underwater acoustic signal

• To understand the characteristics of noises in the sea
• To understand the principles of SONAR and acoustic modem
• To understand the challenges in underwater signal processing and sensor networks

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS 9

The Ocean acoustic environment, measuring sound level, Sources and receivers, relevant units,
sound velocity in seawater, typical vertical profiles of sound velocity, Sound propagation in the
Ocean, Sound attenuation in seawater, Bottom loss, Surface bottom and volume scattering, Snell’s
law for range dependent ocean.

UNIT II AMBIENT NOISE IN THE SEA 9

Sources of ambient noise-introduction, different frequency bands of ambient noise, spatial
coherence of ambient noise, directional characteristics of ambient noise, intermittent sources of
noise- biological & non biological - rain, earthquakes, explosions and volcanoes.

UNIT III CHARACTERISTICS OF SONAR SYSTEMS 9

Sonar systems, active and passive sonar equations, transducers and their directivities, Sensor array
characteristics-array gain, receiving directivity index, beam patterns, adaptive beamforming.

UNIT IV ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9

Adaptive Systems, Open Loop and Closed loop Adaptations, Adaptive Linear Combiner, Adaptive
Algorithms and Structures, Acoustic Modem.

UNIT V UNDERWATER SENSOR NETWORK 9

Underwater Networking- Pollution Monitoring, Environmental Monitoring and Tactical
surveillance systems, challenges in design of Underwater Sensor Networks, Factors that affect the
UWSN.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Summarize the properties of underwater acoustic signal.

CO2: Analyze the characteristics of noises in the sea.
CO3: Apply the principles of SONAR and acoustic modem
 CO4: Acquire knowledge on the challenges in underwater signal processing and sensor
networks.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert J Urick, Principles of Underwater Sound, Peninsula Pub, Third Edition, 1983 (Unit
I & II)
2. William S Burdic, Underwater Acoustic Systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 2002 (Unit III & V)
3. Richard O.Nielsen, Sonar signal processing, Artech House Publishers, 1991.(Unit IV)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert S H Istepanian and Milica Stojanovic, Underwater Acoustic Digital signal
processing & communication system, Kluwer academic Publisher, 2002.
2. Robert J Urick, Ambient noise in the sea, Peninsula Pub, Second Edition, 1986.
3. William S Burdic, Underwater Acoustic Systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 2002.
4. Clay Medwin, Acoustical Oceanography: Principles and Applications, Physics Today,
1978.
5. Brekhovskikh L M and Lysanov Yu P, Fundamentals of ocean acoustics, Springer, Third
Edition, 2003.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2722 SPEECH TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE

The course "Speech Technology" offers a practical and theoretical understanding of how human
speech can be processed by computers. It covers mathematical foundations required for speech
signal processing, speech recognition and speech synthesis. The course involves practical
implementations in the form of assignments, where the student will analyze his or her own voice,
build working speech recognition systems, and build their own synthetic voice. These analyses and
system building will be based on existing toolkits. Details of algorithms, techniques and limitations
of state of the art speech systems will be presented during the course. This course will help students
apply statistical and machine learning techniques on speech technology while understanding their
limitations.

Prerequisites for this course are fundamental knowledge on digital signal processing, and exposure
to fundamental concepts of probability theory.
OBJECTIVES
• Learn the fundamentals of speech processing
• Introduce various features required to build speech-based systems
• Understand statistical modeling techniques and its application in building speech-based
systems.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9

Articulatory phonetics - production and classification of speech sounds; Acoustic phonetics –
Acoustics of speech production, discrete time model of speech. Speech perception - human auditory
system. Short-time Fourier transform, spectrogram, pitch and formant estimation using cepstrum.
Linear prediction – basic concepts, pitch and formant estimation using linear prediction.

UNIT II FEATURE EXTRACTION 9

Fundamentals of pattern recognition and significance of feature selection. Feature Extraction -
MFCC, LPCC and PLP. Speech distortion measures– mathematical and perceptual – Log–spectral
distance, cepstral distances, likelihood distortions. Time alignment and normalization - dynamic
time warping.

UNIT III SPEECH MODELING 9

Statistical modeling of speech - Gaussian mixture modeling, Hidden Markov models - Markov
processes. HMMs - probability evaluation, optimal state sequence - Viterbi search, Baum-Welch
parameter re-estimation.

UNIT IV SPEECH AND SPEAKER RECOGNITION SYSTEMS 9

Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition: subword speech units, sub-word unit models,
training of sub-word units, language models - n-gram statistics. Speaker recognition - speaker
identification and verification. Applications and current status.

UNIT V TEXT-TO-SPEECH SYNTHESIS 9

Text-to-speech synthesis: Text and phonetic analysis, role of prosody in TTS, concatenative and
waveform synthesis, prosody modification of speech - PSOLA. HMM-based text-to-speech
synthesis. Evaluation of TTS systems - quality and intelligibility.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Model speech production system and describe the fundamentals of speech.
CO2: Extract and compare various speech features
CO3: Choose an appropriate statistical speech model for a given application.
CO4: Build a speech and speaker recognition system.
CO5: Build a text-to-speech synthesis system.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rabiner L. R. and Juang B. H, Fundamentals of speech recognition, Pearson Education,
2003 (Unit I to IV).
2. Huang X., Acero A. and Hon H. W., Spoken language processing- a guide to theory,
algorithm and system development, Prentice Hall, 2001 (Unit V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas F. Quatieri, Discrete-time speech signal processing - Principles and practice,
Pearson, 2012.
 2. Rabiner L. R. and Schafer R. W., Digital Processing of speech signals, Pearson Education,
2004.
3. Douglas O’shaughnessy, Speech communications: Human and Machine, Wiley-IEEE
Press, 2000.
4. Shrikanth Narayanan, Text to speech synthesis: new paradigms and advances, Prentice hall,
2005.
5. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin., Speech and Language Processing (2nd Edition),
2009, Prentice-Hall, Inc., USA

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

EMBEDDED AND REAL TIME
UEC2723 3 0 0 3
OPERATING SYSTEMS

PREAMBLE
Embedded and Real time systems have dominated the technology trend in a variety of
applications. Most systems in real life are Cyber Physical systems which require a deeper
understanding of control and computing which are prevalent in Embedded Systems. This course
offers the fundamental concepts and understanding of the design of Embedded Systems

OBJECTIVES
• To understand the concepts of embedded system design and analysis
• To learn the architecture and programming of ARM processor
• To be exposed to the basic concepts of embedded programming
• Learn about real time operating systems

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Complex systems and microprocessors– Embedded system design process –UML overview-Design
example: Model train controller- Design methodologies- Design flows - Requirement Analysis –
Specifications-System analysis and architecture design – Quality Assurance techniques - Designing
with computing platforms – platform-level performance analysis.

UNIT II ARM PROCESSOR AND PERIPHERALS 9

ARM Architecture Versions – ARM Architecture – Instruction Set – Stacks and Subroutines –
Features of the LPC 214X Family – Peripherals – The Timer Unit – Pulse Width Modulation Unit
– UART – Block Diagram of ARM9 and ARM Cortex M3 MCU.

UNIT III EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 9

Components for embedded programs- Models of programs- Assembly, linking and loading –
compilation techniques- Program level performance analysis – Software performance optimization
– Program level energy and power analysis and optimization – Analysis and optimization of
program size- Program validation and testing.

UNIT IV REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Preemptive real-time operating systems- Task Assignment and Scheduling - Priority based
scheduling—RM and EDF scheduling- Evaluating operating system performance- power
optimization strategies for processes – Example Real time operating systems-POSIX-Windows CE-
– Fault Tolerance techniques – Reliability, Evaluation

UNIT V NETWORKS AND MULTIPROCESSORS 9

Multiple tasks and multiple processes – Multirate systems - Interprocess communication
mechanisms - Distributed embedded systems –CAN Bus-I2C Bus- MPSoCs and shared memory
multiprocessors. – Design Example – Engine Control Unit- Video accelerator.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Use the concepts of embedded computing for system design
CO2: Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor
CO3: Develop and optimize software for embedded systems
CO4: Analyze the concepts of real time Operating system design
CO5: Realize the applications of Distributed Embedded Systems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Marilyn Wolf, ―Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System
Design, Third Edition ―Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
(Unit I to III, V)
2. Jane W.S.Liu, Real Time Systemsǁ, Pearson Education, Third Indian Reprint, 003. (Unit
IV)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lyla B.Das, ―Embedded Systems : An Integrated Approach Pearson Education, 2013.
2. Jonathan W.Valvano, ―Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing,
Third Edition Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. David. E. Simon, ―An Embedded Software Primer, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression,
Addison-Wesley Professional, 2007.
4. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, ―An Introduction to Real-Time Systems-
From Design to Networking with C/C++, Prentice Hall, 1999.
5. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, ―Real-Time Systems, International Editions, McGrawHill,
1997
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program Specific
Course Program Outcomes
Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 1 3 3 2
CO3 2 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2724 MIC AND RF SYSTEMS DESIGN 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
This is an advanced course on electromagnetics with a particular interest in the design and
analysis of components that work at radio frequency and microwave bands. The prerequisite for
this course is electromagnetic fields. The course provides a broad overview of component
integration and system development at microwave frequency range.

OBJECTIVES
● To study the fundamentals of scattering parameters
● To understand the concepts of microwave filter and amplifier design
● To familiarize the design aspects of oscillators and mixers
● To study the various microwave systems

UNIT I POWER DIVIDERS AND COUPLERS 9

The Scattering Matrix - Basic Properties of Dividers and Couplers - Wilkinson Power Divider -
Waveguide Directional Coupler - The Quadrature Hybrid - Coupled Line Directional Coupler - The
Lange Coupler - The 180˚ Hybrid.

UNIT II MICROWAVE FILTERS 9

Periodic Structures - Filter Design by Insertion Loss Method, Filter Transformations - Filter
Implementation - Stepped Impedance Low Pass Filter - Coupled Line Band Pass Filter.

UNIT III MICROWAVE AMPLIFIER DESIGN 9

Two port power gains - Stability - Single Stage Transistor Amplifier Design - Design for maximum
gain, Design for specified gain, Low-Noise Amplifier Design - Power Amplifiers.

UNIT IV OSCILLATORS AND MIXERS 9

RF Oscillators – Microwave Oscillators – Oscillator Phase Noise –Mixers: Characteristics, Single
Ended and Balanced Mixers.
UNIT V MICROWAVE SYSTEMS 9
System Aspects of Antennas – Wireless Communications – RADAR Systems, Radiometer Systems
- Microwave propagation – Microwave Heating – Power Transfer – Biological Effects and Safety.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1 : Interpret the concepts of power divider and couplers at microwave frequencies
CO2 : Design microwave filters and amplifier elements
CO3 : Design RF and microwave oscillators and mixers
CO4 : Describe the application of microwave components in systems

TEXTBOOK:
1. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Fourth Edition, 2012. (Unit
I to V).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jia Sheng Hong and Lancaster M J, Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications, John
Wiley & Sons, Second Edition, 2011.
2. Gupta K C and Amarjit Singh, Microwave Integrated Circuits, John Wiley, New York,
1975.
3. Hoffman R K, Handbook of Microwave Integrated Circuits, Artech House, Boston, 1987.
4. Annapurna Das, Sisir K Das, Microwave Engineering, McGraw Hill Education, Third
Edition, 2015.
5. Guillermo Gonzalez, Microwave Transistor Amplifiers: Analysis and Design, Second
Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1996.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR
UEC2725 3 0 0 3
NETWORKS

PREAMBLE:
Wireless Ad hoc and sensor networks deal with in-depth understanding about Ad hoc and wireless
sensor networks. It is one of the most essential subjects for Electronics and Communication
Engineers for developing IoT enabled applications. The main topics covered are Architectures,
physical layer concepts, MAC and Network layer protocols, Transport layer and security issues of
Ad hoc and sensor networks. The course also gives an introduction about sensor network platforms
and tools.

OBJECTIVES:
• To learn Ad Hoc network and Sensor Network fundamentals.
• To understand the different MAC and routing protocols.
• To have an in-depth knowledge on sensor network architecture, design issues and
Networking concepts.
• To understand the transport layer and security issues possible in Ad Hoc and Sensor
Networks.
• To have an exposure to mote programming platforms and tools
UNIT I AD HOC NETWORKS – INTRODUCTION & MAC PROTOCOLS 9
Design Issues in Ad Hoc Networks - MAC Protocols – Issues, Classifications of MAC protocols:
Contention Based Protocols, Contention Based Protocols with reservation mechanisms, and
Contention Based Protocols with Scheduling Mechanism – MAC protocol with Directional
Antenna - Multi channel MAC & Power control MAC protocol.

UNIT II AD HOC ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Issues in designing a routing protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Classifications of routing
protocols: Table Driven Routing Protocols - Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV),
Wireless Routing Protocol (WRP), On–Demand Routing protocols – AODV, Dynamic
Source Routing (DSR), Location Aided Routing (LAR), Hierarchical – Cluster based routing
protocol, Power Aware Routing (PAR), Ad Hoc Transport Layer Issues, TCP Over Ad Hoc –
Feedback based, TCP with explicit link, TCP-Bus, Ad Hoc and Split TCP.

UNIT III WSN ARCHITECTURES 9

Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks,
WSN application examples, Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems and Execution Environments, Network
Architecture - Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit, Design
principles, service interfaces and Gateway Concepts, Protocol Architecture

UNIT IV WSN NETWORKING CONCEPTS 9

Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations, MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor
Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols and Wakeup Concepts - S-MAC, The Mediation Device
Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, and Contention based protocols - PAMAS, Schedule based
Protocols – LEACH, SMACS, TRAMA, IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol, Routing Protocols- Energy
Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing, Transport layer issues and security issues.
UNIT V SENSOR NETWORKS PLATFORM & TOOLS 9
Sensor Node Hardware – Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node-level software
platforms – TinyOS, nesC, Node-level Simulators – The NS2 and its sensor network extensions,
TOSSIM, Programming beyond individual nodes – State centric programming.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Identify the necessity of Ad Hoc networks and Wireless Sensor Networks
CO2: Examine the MAC issues in Ad Hoc and Wireless Sensor Networks
CO3: Describe the sensor node architecture, network and protocol architectures
CO4: Identify the suitable routing algorithm based on the network and user requirement
CO5: Analyze transport layer and security issues possible in ad hoc and sensor networks
CO6: Familiarize with the OS used in WSN and build basic modules using NesC

TEXT BOOK:
1. Siva Ram Murthy C and Manoj B S, Ad Hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and
Protocols, Prentice Hall, PTR, 2004. (Unit I & II)
2. Holger Karl, Andreas Willig, Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks, John
wiley publication, Jan 2006. (Unit III, IV & V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, Wireless Sensor Networks: an information processing
approach, Elsevier publication, 2004. (Unit V)
2. Charles E. Perkins, Ad Hoc Networking, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. Jun Zheng and Abbas Jamalipour, Wireless Sensor Network A Networking Perspective, A
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication, 2009.
4. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati, Wireless Sensor Networks: Technology,
Protocols and Applications, A John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication, 2007.
5. Carlos de Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks,
Theory and Applications, World Scientific 2006.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 3 1 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS
UEC2726 3 0 0 3
COMMUNICATION

PREAMBLE:
This course provides an in-depth understanding on the use of optimization techniques in wireless
communications. The prerequisite for the course is basic knowledge of Linear Algebra with
knowledge on wireless technologies. Recent advances in linear and nonlinear optimization facilitate
progress in many areas of communications. It is a challenging technical knowledge due to various
factors and constraints such as limited bandwidth and battery power, channel variability and user
mobility, higher data rates, system robustness, and seamless service.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand convex sets, functions and their representations.
• To understand the fundamentals of convex optimization.
• To apply convex optimization techniques to wireless systems
• To perform optimal beamforming using Second order cone programming and
Semidefinite programming

UNIT I CONVEX SETS AND FUNCTIONS 9

Affine and Convex sets – Examples of convex sets - Convexity preserving operations, Convex
functions - properties and examples - Jensen’s inequality.

UNIT II CONVEX OPTIMIZATION 9

Convex Optimization Problems– Examples- Linear minimum mean-squared estimator (LMMSE)
of random vectors, Dimension reduction and noise suppression, Low rank matrix approximation,
optimal power assignment.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS IN TRANSMIT POWER ALLOCATION 9

Geometric, Linear and Quadratic Programming, Applications in power allocation - blind source
separation, unmixing and beamformer design.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS IN TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING 9

Robust Beamforming via SOCP, Minimum – Variance Beamformer, Transmit Beamforming via
SOCP, Power Minimization, Max-Min Fair, Multicell and Femtocell Beamforming

UNIT V APPLICATIONS IN MIMO DETECTION 9

Semidefinite program: Applications in combinatorial optimization, practical Examples: ML
MIMO detection and higher order QAM OSTBC detection, applications in transmit beamforming,
Lagrangian Dual problem, KKT conditions.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Summarize concepts of convex sets and functions
CO2: Formulate problems in wireless Communication
CO3: Characterize solutions to convex optimization problems
CO4: Solve optimization problems in MIMO Detection and beamforming
TEXT BOOK:
1. Chong-Yung-Chi, Wei-Chiang Li, Chia-Hsiang Lin, Convex Optimization for Signal
Processing and Communications: From Fundamentals to Applications, CRC Press 2017
(Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S. Boyd and L. Vandenberghe, Convex Optimization, Cambridge University Press, First
Edition, 2009.
2. Ezio Biglieri, Robert Calderbank, Anthony Constantinides, Andrea Goldsmith,
Arogyaswami Paulraj, Vincent Poor.H, MIMO Wireless Communications, Cambridge
University Press, First Edition, 2007.
3. Aditya K Jaganatham, Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems, Tata
McGraw Hill, First Edition, 2015.
4. Randy L. Haupt, Wireless Communications Systems: An Introduction Wiley-IEEE
Press, 2019.
5. Kim, A, Design and optimization for 5g wireless communications, Wiley-IEEE Press,
2020

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO4 1 2 2 3 1 1 1

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2727 ASIC and FPGA BASED DESIGN 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
This course helps the students to understand the design and implementation of VLSI circuits using
various implementation methodologies. This course also provides the design and development of
standard cells and a design flow for Application Specific integrated Circuit (ASIC). This course
overviews the architectures of logic blocks (LB), input/output (IOB) and interconnect architectures
of several FPGA and CPLD families. The FPGA based design flow and physical design of FPGA
based systems are also discussed in this course.
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the design flow of different types of ASIC.
• To learn the different types of programming elements, programmable logic blocks,
programmable input-output blocks and programmable interconnects of various types
FPGA/CPLDs
• To know various steps involved in ASIC implementation for specific targets.
• To comprehend various steps involved in ASIC physical design

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ASICS, ASIC LIBRARY DESIGN AND

PROGRAMMING TECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to ASICs: ASIC Design Flow, Types of ASIC - Full Custom, Semi-Custom – Standard
Cell Based ASIC and Gate Array ASIC, Programmable ASIC – PROM, PLA, PAL, CPLD, FPGA.
ASIC Cell Library Design: Combinational Logic Cell – Sequential Logic Cell - Data Path Logic
Cell - Library Cell Design - Library Architecture Programming Technology: Antifuse, SRAM,
EPROM, EEPROM, ASIC construction.

UNIT II PROGRAMMABLE ASIC LOGIC CELLS, I/O CELLS AND

INTERCONNECT 9
Programmable ASIC Logic Cells: Actel ACT - Xilinx LCA – Altera FLEX - Altera MAX, Vertex
and Spartan FPGAs, Cyclone FPGAs Programmable ASIC I/O Cells: DC & AC Inputs and Outputs
- Clock & Power Inputs - Xilinx I/O Blocks Programmable ASIC Interconnect: Actel ACT -Xilinx
LCA - Xilinx EPLD - Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Altera MAX 9000 - Altera FLEX, Vertex and
Spartan FPGAs, Cyclone FPGAs.

UNIT III LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION & TEST 9

Logic Synthesis: Logic Synthesis – FPGA Synthesis - Verilog and Logic Synthesis -VHDL and
Logic Synthesis
Simulation: Types of Simulation, Logic Simulation – Cell Models & Delay Models, Static Timing
Analysis, Formal Verification, Switch Level Simulation, Transistor Level Simulation
Test: Importance of Test, Boundary Scan Test, Faults, Fault Simulation, ATPG, Scan Test, BIST

UNIT IV SYSTEM PARTITIONING, FLOORPLANNING AND PLACEMENT 9

System Partitioning: Measurement of Partitioning, Partitioning Algorithms – Constructive
Partitioning, Iterative Partitioning Improvement Algorithms - K-L Algorithm, FM algorithm, Ratio-
Cut Algorithm, Look-Ahead Algorithm, Simulated Annealing, FPGA Partitioning, Power
Dissipation. Floor planning and Placement: Floor Planning Measurement and tools, I/O, Power and
clock planning, Measurement of Placement, Placement Algorithms – Min-cut Placement, Eigen
Value Placement, Iterative Placement Improvement and Timing Driven Placement Algorithms.

UNIT V ROUTING AND CIRCUIT EXTRACTION 9

Routing and Circuit Extraction: Global Routing Measurement – Measurement of Interconnect
Delay using Elmore‟s constant, Global routing for CBIC and GA, Detailed Routing Measurement
- Measurement of Channel Density, Detailed routing Algorithms – LEA, Lee Maze and High tower
Algorithms, Circuit extraction process, Layout Design Rules and Technology related issues.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Explain the features of ASIC Design and various implementation methods of ASIC
Design
CO2: Apply design concepts to construct the logic cells and programmable elements.
CO3: Describe the architectures of programmable logic block, programmable input-output
Block and programmable interconnect of Xilinx, Altera and Actel FPGA/CPLD.
CO4: Apply the concepts of logic synthesis to implement an ASIC Design for a specific
target.
CO5: Analyze performance of the ASIC using the concepts of simulation, verification and
testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael John Sebastian Smith, Applications Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson
Education, Ninth Indian Reprint, 13th Edition, 2004 (UNIT I - V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Trimberger S, Edr. Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 1994.
2. Old Field J, Dorf, R, Field Programmable Gate Arrays, John Wiley& Sons, New York,
1995.
3. Chan P.K, & Mourad S, Digital Design using Field Programmable Gate Array, Prentice
Hall, 1994.
4. Sherwani N A, Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation, Kluwer Academic,
Publishers, 2002.
5. Gerez, H, Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation, John Wiley, 1999.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
UEC2728 3 0 0 3
AND COMPATIBILITY

PREAMBLE:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) refers to the ability of electrical equipment to operate
satisfactorily when exposed to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Especially in the development
of embedded systems, EMI is a major problem. Students undertaking this course will develop a
broad understanding of the various aspects of EMC, including standards, measurements and testing
and considerations in wireless and broadband technologies. They will also learn interference control
techniques, with specific focus on shielding.

OBJECTIVES:
• To gain broad conceptual understanding of the various aspects of electromagnetic
Interference and compatibility.
• To develop a theoretical understanding of electromagnetic shielding effectiveness.
• To understand ways of mitigating EMI by using shielding, grounding and filtering
• To understand the need for standards and to appreciate measurement methods
• To understand how EMI impacts wireless and broadband technologies
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Classification of sources - Natural sources - Man-made sources - Surveys of the
electromagnetic environment.

UNIT II SHIELDING 9
Introduction - Shielding effectiveness - Far-field sources - Near-field sources - Low-frequency,
magnetic field shielding - Effects of apertures.

UNIT III INTERFERENCE CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9

Equipment screening - Cable screening - grounding - Power-line filters - Isolation - Balancing -
Signal-line filters - Nonlinear protective devices.

UNIT IV EMC STANDARDS, MEASUREMENTS AND TESTING 9

Need for standards - The international framework - Human exposure limits to EM fields -EMC
measurement techniques - Measurement tools - Test environments

UNIT V EMC CONSIDERATIONS IN WIRELESS AND BROADBAND

TECHNOLOGIES 9
Efficient use of frequency spectrum - EMC, interoperability and coexistence - Specifications and
alliances - Transmission of high-frequency signals over telephone and power networks - EMC and
digital subscriber lines - EMC and power line telecommunications.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Define and explain various terms, ideas, issues and methods in the field of EMI/EMC.
CO2: Analyze electromagnetic field coupling through apertures.
CO3: Critically examine the need for standards and why limits prescribed by different
Standards could be widely different.
CO4: Evaluate the impact of EMI on wireless and broadband technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Christopoulos C, Principles and Techniques of Electromagnetic Compatibility, CRC Press,
Second Edition, Indian Edition, 2013. (Units I, III, IV and V).
2. Paul C R, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, Wiley India, Second Edition, 2008.
(Unit II)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kodali V P, Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility, Wiley India, Second Edition,
2010.
2. Ernhard Keiser, Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility, Artech house, Norwood,
Third Edition, 1986.
3. Henry W Ott, Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering, John Wiley & Sons Inc,
Newyork, 2009.
4. Scott Bennett W, Control and Measurement of Unintentional Electromagnetic Radiation,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., Wiley Interscience Series, 1997
5. Online book "EMC testing: The beginners' guide.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 1 2 2
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2729 WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Wireless industry has become the fastest growing sector of the telecommunications industry, and
there is hardly anybody in the world who is not a user of some form of wireless technology. This
course introduces with the most up-to-date technological developments in wireless communication
systems/networks and the major 3G standards, such as W-CDMA, CDMA2000 as well as 4G that
has come into use in the recent past and 5G wireless technologies that have emerged only very
recently. This course is unique because it provides the foundation of understanding and working
for future generation of wireless systems.

OBJECTIVES:
• To gain knowledge about the 3G cellular standards.
• To comprehend LTE specific signalling protocols and procedures.
• To build an understanding of the concepts of wireless data networks
• To acquire broad knowledge on 5G mobile and wireless communications
technologies.

UNIT I 3G MOBILE CELLULAR TECHNOLOGIES 9

CDMA2000-Operational Advantages, General Architecture, Airlink Design, Data Throughput,
Forward Link Scheduling, Reverse Link, CDMA2000 1xEV Signaling, Handoffs, CDMA2000
1xEV-DO, CDMA2000 1xEV-DV.
WCDMA-ETSI UMTS versus ARIB WCDMA, UMTS Cell and Network Structure, UMTS Radio
Interface, UMTS, UTRA Channels, UTRA Multiplexing and Frame Structure, Spreading and
Carrier Modulations, Packet Data, Power Control, Handovers.

UNIT II LTE AND LTE-ADVANCED NETWORKS 9

Overview of LTE Networks - The Radio Protocol Architecture, The Interfaces, Support for Home
eNBs (Femtocells), Air Interface, Frame Structure, UE States and State Transitions, Quality of
Service and Bandwidth Reservation, Mobility Management, Security, Frame-Structure in LTE,
Frame-Structure in LTE-Advanced, LTE Identification, Naming and Addressing.

UNIT III WIRELESS DATA NETWORKS 9

IEEE 802.11 Standards for Wireless Networks, IEEE 802.11a Supplement to 802.11 Standards,
IEEE 802.11 Security, IEEE 802.15 WPAN Standards, IEEE 802.16 WMAN Standards, ETSI
HIPERLAN and ETSI HIPERLAN/2 Standards, MMAC by Japan.

UNIT IV THE 5G ARCHITECTURE 9

Introduction- NFV and SDN, Basics about RAN architecture, High-level requirements for the 5G
architecture- Functional architecture and 5G flexibility, Functional split criteria, Functional split
alternatives, Functional optimization for specific applications, Integration of LTE and new air
interface to fulfil 5G, requirements, Enhanced Multi-RAT coordination features, Physical
architecture and 5G deployment

UNIT V THE 5G RADIO-ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES 9

Access design principles for multi-user communications, Multi-carrier with filtering: a new
waveform, Non-orthogonal schemes for efficient multiple access, Radio access for dense
deployments, Radio access for V2X communication, Radio access for massive machine-type
communication.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Build and design wireless networks based on the 3G standards.
CO2: Illustrate the concepts behind LTE standard.
CO3: Explain the wireless data network related components and its functions.
CO4: Demonstrate advanced knowledge on 5G technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hsiao-Hwa Chen and Mohsen Guizani, “Next Generation Wireless Systems and
Networks”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2006. (Unit I & III).
2. Afif Osseiran Jose F, Monserrat and Patrick Marsch “5G Mobile and Wireless
Communications Technology”, Cambridge University Press 2016. (Unit IV & V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Abd-Elhamid M. Taha, Hossam S. Hassanein and Najah Abu Ali. “LTE, LTE-Advanced
and WiMAX towards IMT-Advanced networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2012. (Unit II)
2. Harri Holma, Antti Toskala LTE for UMTS: Evolution to LTE-Advanced, 2nd Edition,
Wiley, 2011.
3. K. Fazel and S. Kaiser, “Multi-Carrier and Spread Spectrum Systems-From OFDM and MC-
CDMA to LTE and WiMAX”, 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
4. Steve Rackley, “Wireless Networking Technology: From Principles to Successful
Implementation”, Elsevier, 2007.
5. Angeliki Alexiou, “5G Wireless Technologies”, IET Telecommunications Series 69, 2017.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
UEC2731 3 0 0 3
SECURITY

PREAMBLE:
Communication Network Security deals with the symmetric, asymmetric cryptographic algorithms
and authentication algorithms that give an understanding of the techniques to be used for real time
applications. It also explains the various key management techniques and to analyze the same for
real time scenarios. The subject deals with some of the security issues and challenges occurring in
various types of networks.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the classical ciphers, and public key cryptography
• To Study block ciphers for practical implementation
• To study Hash functions and MAC functions
• To have a clear knowledge about the key management techniques
• To understand and study the security issues and challenges in various networks
UNIT I CLASSICAL CIPHERS 9
Services – Mechanisms and Attacks – OSI security Architecture – Model for Network Security –
Classical Encryption Techniques – Symmetric Cipher Model – Substitution Techniques –
Transposition Techniques – Rotor Machines– Stenography.

UNIT II PUBLIC KEY ENCRYPTION 9

Block Ciphers and Data Encryption Standard: Simplified DES – Block Cipher Principles, Block
Cipher Design Principles – Block Cipher Modes of Operation. Principles of Public Key
Cryptosystems – RSA Algorithm, Key Management and other public key cryptosystems– Diffie–
Hellman Key Exchange. Basics of ECC algorithm.

UNIT III HASH & MAC FUNCTIONS 9

Message Authentication and Hash Functions – Authentication Requirements– Authentication
Functions – Message Authentication Codes – Hash Functions and MACs; Hash Algorithms – MD5
Message Digest Algorithm, Digital Signatures and Authentication protocols.

UNIT IV MUTUAL TRUST 9

Key Management and Distribution-Symmetric Key Distribution Using Symmetric Encryption,
Symmetric Key Distribution Using Asymmetric Encryption, Distribution of Public Keys, X.509
Certificates, Public-Key Infrastructure.

UNIT V NETWORK & INTERNET SECURITY 9

Web security-Secure Electronic Transaction, Web Security Considerations- Web Security
Threats, Web Traffic Security Approaches, Wireless Security-Wireless Network Threats, Wireless
Security Measures, Mobile Device Security-Security Threats, Mobile Device Security Strategy, IP
Security Overview.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Acquire knowledge on different types of classical, public key cryptographic
algorithms, and authentication algorithms
CO2: Apply block ciphers for software and hardware applications
CO3: Analyse various key management techniques
CO4: Acquire Knowledge on network and Internet security

TEXT BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, Fourth edition, 2005. (Unit I to IV)
2. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, Sixth edition, 2016. (Unit V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R.K.Nichols and P.C. Lekkas, Wireless Security: Models, Threats, and Solutions Mc
Graw-Hill, First edition, 2002.
2. Charlie Kaufman, Network Security Private Communication in Public World, Prentice,
Hall of India New Delhi, Second edition, 2004.
3. C K Shyamala, N Harini and Dr.TR Padmanabhan: Cryptography and Network Security,
Wiley India Pvt.Ltd, First edition, 2001.
4. BehrouzA.Foruzan, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGraw Hill, First
Edition, 2007.
5. Jonathan Katz, Yehuda Lindell, Introduction to modern cryptography, Chapman &
Hall/CRC Taylor & Francis Group, First edition, 2008

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 3 3
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2732 MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Mixed signal design is an advanced topic for undergraduate education that plays a vital role in many
fields such as communication system, signal processing, where data conversion from analog-to-
digital or digital-to-analog conversion is required. Analog signals need to be discretized to be used
in digital data processing and vice-versa. This course provides the basic understanding of data
sampling and its hardware requirements, possible architectures and analysis of analog-to-digital
and digital-to-analog conversion, and an introduction to its building blocks.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand and design Sample/hold circuits, and analog Comparators
• To understand and design Digital to Analog converters
• To understand and design Analog to Digital Converters
• To understand and design data converter amplifiers and comparators
UNIT I SAMPLE AND HOLD CIRCUITS 9
Analog versus Discrete time signals, analog to digital signal conversion, Sampling switches:
Impulse sampling, decimation, sample and hold, track and hold, interpolation, sample and hold
gain, aperture error, Analog integrator, Issues in data converters: sampling, quantization and
reconstruction, oversampling and aliasing.

UNIT II SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS AND COMPARATORS 9

Switched capacitor architecture: Switched capacitor integrator, Current mode architecture, Basic
comparator, characteristics of comparator, clock comparator, Comparator: Single stage amplifier,
cascaded amplifier, latched comparator.

UNIT III DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS 9

Differential non-linearity (DNL), Integral non-linearity (INL), Offset, Gain Error, Signal to noise
ratio, dynamic range, Reference multiplication and division: voltage, current and charge division,
Resistor ladder DAC: switching functions, architecture with switched sub divider, Current steering
DAC: R-2R network switching functions, R-2R network architecture, Binary to thermometer code
conversion, Design challenges: Current element matching, clock feed through, zero order hold.

UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS 9

Quantization error, Differential non-linearity (DNL), Integral non-linearity (INL), Offset, Gain
Error, Signal to noise ratio, aliasing, ADC architecture: Successive approximation register(SAR)
ADC, Pipelined ADC, Flash ADC, Performance metrics: Slew in sampling point, input capacitance
non-linearity, charge redistribution in DAC, comparator offset cancellation.

UNIT V BUILDING BLOCKS OF DATA CONVERSION SYSTEMS 9

Amplifier circuits: open-loop amplifiers, closed-loop amplifiers, operational amplifiers, Gain
boosting techniques, common-mode feedback, Comparator circuits: Bipolar comparators, CMOS
comparators and BiCMOS comparators, Comparator offset cancellation, operational amplifier
offset cancellation.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Design and analyze sample and hold and design sampling switches
CO2: Design and analyze switched capacitor banks and analog comparators for data
Converters
CO3: Design DAC circuits and analyze its performance through its the various parameters
CO4: Design ADC circuits and analyze its performance through its the various parameters
CO5: Design MOSFET based amplifier and comparator circuits for data converters

TEXT BOOK:
1. Behzad Razavi, Principles of data conversion system design, Wiley-Blackwell, First
Edition, 1994. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Jacob Baker, CMOS: Mixed-Signal Circuit Design, Wiley, 2008.
2. Franco Maloberti, Data converters, Springer, 2007.
3. Rudy Van De Plassche, CMOS integrated Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog
Converters, Springer, Second Edition, 2005.
4. Mikael Gustavsson, J. Jacob Wikner, and Nianxiong Tan, CMOS Data Converters for
Communications, Kluwer academic publishers, 2000.
5. Jacob Baker R, CMOS: Circuit design, layout and simulation, Wiley Interscience,
Second Edition, 2008.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Program Outcomes Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO4 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2733 DIGITAL SIGNAL INTEGRITY 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
Signal integrity plays a dominant role in the field of electronic system design. Design of digital
electronic systems requires knowledge of electromagnetic theory, transmission-line analysis and
differential equations. Effective functioning of such systems while scaled / operated at high speeds
defines its robustness. This course provides the basic knowledge required to understand and analyze
the issues associated with high speed circuits and the techniques to overcome them.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the fundamental concepts of signal integrity.
• To understand cross talk in unbounded conductive media.
• To learn the types of dielectric materials.
• To understand differential cross talk and CMOS based I/O circuit models.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 9
The Basics - Maxwell’s Equations, Common Vector Operators - Wave Propagations-Electrostatics
- Magneto statics - Power flow and the Poynting Vector - Reflections of Electromagnetic Waves.

UNIT II CROSS TALK AND ITS MITIGATION 9

Mutual Inductance and Capacitance - Coupled Wave Equations - Coupled Line Analysis - Modal
Analysis - Crosstalk Minimization - Signals Propagation in Unbounded Conductive Media - Classic
Conductor Model for Transmission models.

UNIT III DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Polarization of Dielectrics - Classification of Dielectric Materials - Frequency Dependent Dielectric
Behavior - Fiber Weave Effect - Environmental Variation in Dielectric Behavior Transmission Line
Parameters for Lossy Dielectrics and Realistic Conductors.

UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL SIGNALING 9

Removal of Common Mode Noise - Differential Crosstalk - Virtual Reference Plane -Propagation
of Modal Voltages - Common Terminology - Drawbacks of Differential Signaling.

UNIT V CHANNEL AND I/O CIRCUITS MODELLING 9

Creating a Physical Transmission Line Model - I/O Design Considerations - Push-Pull
Transmitters - CMOS Receivers - ESD Protection Circuits - On Chip Termination - Bergeron
Diagrams.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of signal integrity in high speed PCBs.
CO2: Identify and resolve crosstalk.
CO3: Interpret the frequency dependence of dielectrics
CO4: Explain the design considerations in channel and I/O circuits.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Stephen H. Hall, Howard L. Heck, Advanced Signal Integrity for High-Speed Digital
Designs, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2009. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James Edgar Buchanan, Signal and power integrity in digital systems: TTL, CMOS, and
BiCMOS, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1996.
2. Mike Peng Li, Jitter, Noise, and Signal Integrity at High-Speed, First Edition, Prentice,
Hall, 2007.
3. Eric Bogatin, Signal and Power Integrity - Simplified, Second Edition, Prentice Hall,
2004.
4. Douglas Brooks, Signal Integrity Issues and Printed Circuit Board Design, First Edition,
Prentice Hall PTR, 2003.
5. H. W. Johnson and M. Graham, High-Speed Digital Design: A Handbook of Black Magic,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 1993.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2
CO4 1 3 3 3 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2821 COGNITIVE RADIO 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
This course introduces an intelligent wireless communication system that is aware of its
surrounding environment, able to learn from the environment and adapts to the dynamic variations
in the environment, thus improving spectrum utilization. The cognitive radio evolution,
architecture, standards, applications and concepts such as spectrum sensing and dynamic spectrum
access are explored in detail.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concepts and architecture of cognitive radio.
• To learn spectrum sensing and dynamic spectrum access.
• To understand the MAC and Network layer design for cognitive radio.
• To describe the advancements and applications of cognitive radio.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE RADIOS 9
Evolution of Software Defined Radio and Cognitive radio - key applications, regulatory issues of
cognitive access, spectrum measurements and usage, Applications for spectrum occupancy data.

UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE 9

Cognitive Radio – functions, Cognition cycle – orient, plan, decide and act phases, SDR as a
platform for Cognitive Radio Architecture, Cognitive Radio Standards - Overview of IEEE 802.22
standard for broadband wireless access in TV bands.

UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS 9

Introduction – Primary user detection techniques – energy detection, feature detection, matched
filtering, cooperative detection, Fundamental Tradeoffs in spectrum sensing, Spectrum Sharing
Models of Dynamic Spectrum Access - Unlicensed and Licensed Spectrum Sharing.

UNIT IV MAC AND NETWORK LAYER DESIGN 9

MAC for cognitive radios – Random Access, Time Slotted and Hybrid Protocols, Network layer
design – routing in cognitive radios, flow control and error control techniques.

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9

Overview of security issues in cognitive radios, auction based spectrum markets in cognitive
radio networks, public safety and cognitive radio.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the concepts and challenges of cognitive radio.
CO2: Comprehend various standardization activities of cognitive radio.
CO3: Apply detection techniques for cognitive radio spectrum sensing
CO4: Implement MAC and Network layer protocols for dynamic spectrum sharing.
CO5: Identify the role of cognitive radio for public safety networks and spectrum markets

TEXT BOOK:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, Thomas Hou, Cognitive Radio
Communications and Networks, Academic Press, Elsevier, 2010. (Unit I, III and V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bruce Fette, Cognitive Radio Technology, Newnes, 2006. (Unit II).
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, Cognitive Radio Networks, John Wiley and Sons,
2009. (Unit IV).
3. Huseyin Arslan (Ed.), Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless,
Systems, Springer, 2007.
4. Ezio Biglieri, Andrea J. Goldsmith, Larry J. Greenstein H. Vincent Poor, Narayan B.
Mandayam, Principles of Cognitive Radio, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
5. Geetam Tomar, Ashish Bagwari, Jyotshana Kanti, Introduction to Cognitive Radio
Networks and Applications, CRC Press, First Edition, 2016
 CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 3 3 3 1 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 2 3 3 3 1 2

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER
UEC2824 3 0 0 3
VISION

PREAMBLE:
This course covers the fundamentals of how computers can be made to see and interpret the world
as humans do. The course covers core concepts on the capabilities of human vision to understand
the digital processing of images and video. Computer vision has evolved an area of its own. In the
last few years, a number of applications have emerged in Automotive, Healthcare, Agriculture,
Banking AR and VR etc. with the increased availability of vast amounts of reordered data and
computational capability, deep Learning is one of the most exciting fields of interest. Thus, this
course also provides basic knowledge about deep learning.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the image formation and processing.
• To understand feature-based image matching.
• To understand the models for motion estimation in video.
• To study Depth estimation algorithms for 3D reconstruction.
• To understand deep learning techniques for computer vision.

UNIT I IMAGE FORMATION AND PROCESSING 9

Introduction - Geometric transformations – Photometric image formation -digital camera- Point
operators, Linear Filtering Nonlinear filtering, Bilateral filtering, Binary image processing.
Pyramids and wavelets.

UNIT II FEATURE DETECTION AND MATCHING 9

Feature detectors and descriptors -matching techniques and feature tracking, Points and patches,
Edge detection, Contour detection and Tracking

UNIT III MOTION ESTIMATION 9

Alignment techniques, translational motion, Parametric and spline-based motion estimation,
Optical flow model, layered motion model.
UNIT IV DEPTH ESTIMATION AND 3D RECONSTRUCTION 9
Epipolar geometry, Sparse correspondence, Dense correspondence, Multi view stereo, Monocular
depth estimation, 3D Shape reconstruction – Surface, Point, Volume and Model based
reconstruction, Image-based and video-based rendering, 3D Video.

UNIT V DEEP LEARNING FOR COMPUTER VISION 9

Deep neural networks, Convolutional neural networks - Lenet, Alexnet, VGG and U-Net
architectures, Three-dimensional CNNs, Sequence modelling, Generative models. Application of
deep learning in hand written digit recognition.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Describe image formation and fundamental image processing techniques required
for computer vision.
CO2: Outline feature detectors and implement image matching techniques.
CO3: Evaluate motion estimation techniques
CO4: Analyse importance of depth estimation and 3D construction.
CO5: Apply Deep learning models for computer vision applications.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Zaleski R., Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Second Edition Springer
2020. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mark Nixon and Alberto S. Aquado, Feature Extraction & Image Processing for.
Computer Vision, Third Edition, Academic Press, 2012
2. John C. Russ, the Image Processing Handbook, CRC Press, 2007.
3. Baggio D. L. et al., MPoastering OpenCV with Practical Computer Vision Projects,
Packet Publishing, 2012.
4. Manas Kamal Bhuyan , Computer Vision and Image Processing: Fundamentals and
Applications, CRC press 2019.
5 Gonzalez, Rafael C., Woods, Richard E, Digital image processing, Pearson, 2018.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2822 CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE:
CMOS Analog IC Design plays a vital role in the design of Analog VLSI circuits and eventually
its applications in communication systems, signal processing, memory subsystems etc., Analog
signals are swing limited, frequency dependent, sensitive to noise from surrounding circuitry and
power supply. This course provides a deep understanding of MOSFET based amplifiers design
(Single stage, and differential amplifier), their frequency response analysis, and their use as an
operational amplifier suitable for many applications.

OBJECTIVES:
• To study the construction, operation, characteristics and analysis of analog CMOS
circuits such as current sources/sinks, current mirrors/reference, voltage references.
• To familiarize with the construction, operation, characteristics and analysis of CMOS
single stage and differential amplifiers.
• To learn the construction, operation, characteristics and analysis of single stage and two
stage CMOS operational amplifiers.
• To understand the construction, operation, characteristics and analysis of CMOS data
converters.

UNIT I CMOS ANALOG SUBCIRCUITS 9

Introduction to Analog Integrated Circuit Design – Analog Switches - Active Resistors - Current
Sources & Sinks – Passive and Active Current Mirrors: Basic Current Mirrors, Cascode Current
Mirrors and Active Current Mirrors – Voltage & Current References – Bandgap References:
General Considerations, Supply Independent Biasing, Temperature Independent, PTAT Current
Generation, Constant Gm Boosting, Speed and Noise issues.

UNIT II SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIERS 9

Basic Concepts - Common Source Stage - Common Gate Stage - Source Follower - Cascode &
Folded Cascade Stages. Frequency Response & Noise Analysis.

UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Single Ended & Differential Operation - Basic Differential Pair – Qualitative & Quantitative
Analysis - Common Mode Response, Differential Pair with MOS Loads - Gilbert Cell. Frequency
Response & Noise Analysis.

UNIT IV FEEDBACK, STABILITY AND FREQUENCY COMPENSATION 9

Feedback topologies: Voltage-voltage feedback, current-voltage feedback, voltage-current
feedback, current-current feedback, Stability and frequency compensation: general considerations,
multiple systems, phase margin, frequency compensation, frequency compensation in two-stage
Op. Amp.

UNIT V OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

General Considerations - One Stage Op Amps - Two Stage Op Amps – Gain Boosting – Common
Mode Feedback- Input Range Limitations – Slew Rate – Power Supple Rejection – Frequency
Response of One Stage and Two Stage Op Amps - Noise in OpAmps.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Design and analyze current and voltage reference and biasing circuits.
CO2: Design and analyze CMOS single stage amplifiers based on their performance metrics.
CO3: Design and analyze CMOS Differential amplifiers based on their performance metrics.
CO4: Design and analyze feedback topologies and frequency response of amplifiers.
CO5: Design CMOS operational amplifiers and analyze its performance metrics.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Behzad Razavi, Design of CMOS Analog Integrated Circuits, McGraw Hill Publications,
Second Edition, 2016. (Unit I to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jacob Baker R, CMOS: Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation, Wiley Publications, third
Edition, 2018.
2. Philip E Allen and Douglas R. Holberg, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford
University Press, Third Edition, 2012.
3. Hurst, Gray and Lewis Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits,
Publications, Fifth Edition, 2014.
4. Kenneth Martin Chan Carusone, David Johns, Analog Integrated Circuit Design, 2ed,
Wiley, 2013.
5. Sergio Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits, 4th
edition, McGraw Hill, 2016.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
 COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
SENSORS, ACTUATORS AND
UEC2823 3 0 0 3
INTERFACES

PREAMBLE:
Sensors and actuators deal with the study of measurement of different types of sensors and actuators
and to perform the statistical analysis of measurements subject to errors in the system. It defines
the characteristics of sensors and actuators and gives an in-depth knowledge of the operation of
various sensors and its applications when subjected to different physical parameters. The subject
also deals with the operation of smart sensors and its requirements for interfacing the sensors with
embedded systems for real time engineering applications.

OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the definitions and characteristics of sensors and actuators.
• To perform statistical analysis of measurements subject to errors in the system.
• To acquire knowledge on type of sensors to be used for practical applications.
• To interface electronic sensors for various engineering applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SENSOR-BASED MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 8

Introduction, Measurement Units, Measurement System Design, Measurement System
Applications, Classification of sensors and actuators, Performance characteristics of sensors and
actuators-Static and dynamic Characteristics of Instruments.

UNIT II STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF MEASUREMENT SUBJECT TO

RANDOM ERRORS 9
Definitions of Systematic and Random errors, Mean and Median Values, Standard Deviation and
Variance, Graphical Data Analysis Techniques-Frequency Distributions, Gaussian (Normal)
Distribution, Standard Gaussian Tables (z-Distribution), Standard Error of the Mean, Estimation of
Random Error in a Single Measurement, Distribution of Manufacturing Tolerances, Sensor Signal
Characteristics, Aliasing, Quantization, Analog Signal Processing.

UNIT III TEMPERATURE, ACOUSTIC SENSORS & ACTUATORS 9

Thermoresistive sensors- Resistance temperature detectors (RTD), Thermistors, Thermoelectric

sensors-Thermopiles, p–n junction temperature sensors, other temperature sensors-Thermo
mechanical sensors and actuators. Piezoelectric effect-Electrostriction, Piezoelectric sensor,
Ultrasonic sensor and actuators.
UNIT IV OPTICAL SENSORS & ACTUATORS 9
Feedback Effects of optical radiation-Thermal effects, Quantum effects, Quantum-based optical
sensors-Photo conducting sensors, Photodiodes, Photovoltaic diodes and Phototransistors,
Photoelectric sensors- The photoelectric sensor and Photomultipliers, Thermal based optical
sensors-Passive IR sensors, Thermopile PIR, Pyroelectric sensor, Optical actuators.

UNIT V ELECTRIC, MAGNETIC & RADIATION SENSORS AND

ACTUATORS 10
The electric field- capacitive sensors and actuators-Capacitive position, proximity, and
displacement sensors, Capacitive fluid level sensors, Capacitive actuators, Magnetic fields- sensors
and actuators-Inductive sensors, Hall effect sensors. Radiation sensors- Antennas as sensors and
actuators, General relations, Antennas as sensing elements, Smart Sensors-Wireless sensors and
actuators and issues associated with their use, RFIDs and embedded sensors and general
requirements for interfacing sensors and actuators-signal level and impedance.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Classify various sensors & actuators and acquire knowledge of the performance
characteristics of sensors and actuators.
CO2: Analyze the statistical measurements of sensors subject to different types of errors.
CO3: Measure and apply the sensors for various physical parameters.
CO4: Apply & Interface sensors and actuators for various real time engineering applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alan S Morris, Measurement and Instrumentation Principles, Butterworth Hienemann,
Second edition, 2001 (Unit I & II).
3. Nathan Ida, Sensors, Actuators and their Interfaces, A multidisciplinary introduction
Published by the Institution of Engineering and Technology, London, United
Kingdom, Second Edition, 2020. (Unit III to V)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramon Pallás Areny, John G. Webster, Sensors and Signal conditioning, John Wiley and
Sons, Second Edition, 2000.
4. Doebelin E O, Measurement Systems, Application and Design, McGraw Hill, Fifth
Edition, 2004.
3. Ian R Sinclair, Sensors and Transducers, Newnes publishers, Third Edition, 2001.
4. Jack P Holman, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw Hill, USA, Seventh Edition,
2001.
5. Patranabis D, Sensors and Transducers, Tata McGraw Hill, Seventh Edition, 2003.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
 SYLLABI FOR HONOURS COURESES

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

UEC2H61 EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 2 0 2 3

PREAMBLE
Embedded and Real time systems have dominated the technology trend in a variety of applications.
Most systems in real life are Cyber Physical systems which require a deeper understanding of
control and computing which are prevalent in Embedded Systems. This course offers the
fundamental concepts and understanding of the design of Embedded Systems
OBJECTIVES
● To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Programming
● To introduce the GNU C Programming Toolchain in Linux.
● To study basic concepts of embedded C, Embedded OS & Python Programming

UNIT I EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 12

C and Assembly - Programming Style - Declarations and Expressions - Arrays, Qualifiers and
Reading Numbers - Decision and Control Statements - Programming Process - Variable Scope and
Functions - C Preprocessor - Advanced Types – Simple Pointers –Debugging and Optimization –
In-line Assembly.
UNIT II C PROGRAMMING TOOLCHAIN IN LINUX 12
C preprocessor - Stages of Compilation - Introduction to GCC - Debugging with GDB - The Make
utility - GNU Configure and Build System - GNU Binary utilities - Profiling - using gprof -
Introduction to GNU C Library
UNIT III EMBEDDED C 12
Adding Structure to ‘C’ Code: Object oriented programming with C, Header files for Project and
Port, Examples. Meeting Real-time constraints: Creating hardware delays - Need for timeout
mechanism -Creating loop timeouts - Creating hardware timeouts.
UNIT IV EMBEDDED OS 12
Creating embedded operating system: Basis of a simple embedded OS, Introduction to sEOS,
Using Timer 0 and Timer 1, Portability issue, Alternative system architecture, Important design
considerations when using sEOSMemory requirements - embedding serial communication &
scheduling data transmission - Case study: Intruder alarm system.
UNIT V PYTHON PROGRAMMING 12
Basics of PYTHON Programming Syntax and Style – Python Objects– Dictionaries – comparison
with C programming on Conditionals and Loops – Files – Input and Output – Errors and Exceptions
–Functions – Modules, Imaging libraries, Networking libraries, Classes and OOP – Execution
Environment, Case study: Traffic sign detection system for Autonomous Electric Vehicles.
 TOTAL PERIODS: 60

LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS

S.No Description of Equipment / Software

1 PCs with Embedded IDE

2 PCs with Linux OS

3 Any freeware RTOS

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the principles of embedded programming
CO2: Apply toolchain programming in an embedded system design
CO3: Understand the programming constructs of embedded C
CO4: Apply and analyse OS-features for an embedded real-time system
CO5: Design various software modules of embedded system using Python

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Steve Oualline, ‘Practical C Programming 3rd Edition’, O’Reilly Media, Inc, 2006.
2. Michael J Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Christian Hill, Learning Scientific Programming with Python, Cambridge University
Press ,2016.
4. Wesley J.Chun, “Core python application Programming 3rd Edition”, Pearson Educat,
2016.
5. Mark J.Guzdial,” Introduction to computing and programming in python –a Multimedia
approach” ,4th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2H21 IoT ARCHITECTURES 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
The Internet of Things (IoT) is a network of physical objects that are embedded with sensors,
software, and other technologies for the purpose of connecting and exchanging data with other
devices and systems over the internet. Nowadays IoT enabled devices are designed and developed
for wide range of applications such as building and home automation, smart city, smart grid, smart
agriculture, transportation, military and healthcare etc. IoT Architectures becomes one of the most
essential subjects for Electronics and Communication Engineers. The main topics covered are M2M
and IoT technology fundamentals, Architecture reference model, Reference architecture and real-
world design constraints followed by a case study.

OBJECTIVES
• To study about transition from M2M to IoT with the required architectural overview.
• To learn M2M and IoT technology fundamentals.
• To gain in-depth knowledge about architecture reference model.
• To understand the steps involved in building IoT reference architecture.
• To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real-world scenario

UNIT I M2M TO IoT: AN ARCHITECTURAL OVERVIEW 9

Introduction – From M2M to IoT – The Global context – A use case example - Building architecture
- Main design principles and needed capabilities - An IoT architecture outline - Standards
considerations.

UNIT II M2M AND IoT TECHNOLOGY FUNDAMENTALS 9

Devices and Gateways – Device types, Deployment scenarios for devices, Basic devices, Gateways,
Advanced devices – Local and Wide Area Networking – Managing M2M data – Data generation,
Data acquisition, Data validation, Data storage, Data processing, Data remanence and Data analysis.

UNIT III ARCHITECTURE REFERENCE MODE 9

Introduction - Reference model and architecture - IoT reference model - IoT domain model -
Information model - Functional model - Device functional group, Communication functional group,
IoT Service functional group, Virtual Entity functional group, IoT Service organization functional
group, IoT Process Management functional group, Management functional group, Security
functional group, Application functional group, Modular IoT functions - Communication model -
Safety, privacy, trust, security model.

UNIT IV IoT REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE 9

Introduction - Functional view - Device and application functional group, Communication
functional group, IoT Service functional group, Virtual Entity functional group, IoT process
management functional group, Service Organization functional group, Security functional group,
Management functional group - Information view - Deployment and operational view.

UNIT V REAL WORLD CASE STUDIES 9

Real world technical design constraints - Devices and networks - Functional requirements, Sensing
and communications field, Programming and embedded intelligence, Power, Gateway
Nonfunctional requirements, financial cost - Data representation and visualization - Interaction and
remote control – Case Study: Participatory Sensing – Roles, actors, engagement, Participatory
sensing process, Technology overview, Recent trends and modern example.
 TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES

On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Demonstrate the transition from M2M to IoT transition with architectural overview.
CO2: Interpret the M2M and IoT technology fundamentals
CO3: Develop IoT Architecture for a particular application scenario.
CO4: Build IoT reference architecture for a given scenario.
CO5: Demonstrate the real-world technical design constraints for a given application
scenario.

REFERENCES
1. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis,Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand.
David Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things - Introduction to a New
Age of Intelligence, Elsevier, 2014.
2. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, Internet of Things – A hands-on approach, Universities
Press, 2015.
3. Edward Ashford Lee, SanjitArunkumarSeshia, Introduction to Embedded Systems – A
Cyber Physical Systems Approach, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2017.
4. Honbo Zhou, The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective, CRC Press,
2012.
5. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols, Wiley, 2012.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 1 1
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
IOT COMMUNICATION
UEC2H22 3 0 0 3
TECHNOLOGIES

PREAMBLE
Internet of Things (IoT) is rapidly gathering momentum due to the advancements in sensor
networks, mobile devices, wireless communications, networking, and cloud technologies. This
course is intended to cover communication technologies of IoT. It provides an insight on
communication principles, protocols, advanced networking concepts and LPWAN technologies
used in the IoT scenario.

OBJECTIVES
● To appreciate the IoT communication fundamentals.
● To understand and differentiate between the various connective technologies
● To comprehend the advanced IoT networking and routing methodologies
● To learn the various LPWAN technologies.

UNIT I IOT COMMUNICATION BASICS 9

M2M and IoT, Layered Architectures, System Components - IoT Networking, Types of Networks,
Devices, Security, Wireless Sensor Networks.
UNIT II IOT PROTOCOLS: PHYSICAL & LINK LAYERS 9
Physical & Link Layer - Wireline- ITU-T G.9903, MSTP – Wireless- IEEE 802.15.4, BLE, ITU-T
G.9959, DECT ULE, NFC.

UNIT III IOT PROTOCOLS: HIGHER LAYERS 9

Network and Transport Layers – 6LoWPAN, 6TiSCH - Application Layer - CoAP, MQTT, AMQP
UNIT IV IOT NETWORKING AND ROUTING 9
DNS- mDNS - CoAP Service Discovery - UPnP- Routing Concepts – RPL- LOADng
UNIT V LPWAN TECHNOLOGIES 9
LoRa - SigFox - D7AP - Weightless - NB-IoT- More LPWAN Technologies- NB-Fi, IQRF, RPMA
Telensa, SNOW, NWave

TOTAL PERIODS: 45

OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
 CO1 : Apply the communication concepts of IoT in real world applications
CO2 : Identify a suitable protocol for a specific application.
CO3 : Differentiate various connective technologies
CO4 : Comprehend the networking and routing procedures used in IoT.
CO5 : Appreciate the need for LPWAN technologies in real time applications.

TEXT BOOK
1. Rolando Herrero, Fundamentals of IoT Communication Technologies, Springer, 2022.
ISBN 978-3-030-70080-5

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sudip Misra, Anandarup Mukherjee, Arijit Roy, Introduction to IoT Cambridge University
press 2021.
2. Veena S. Chakravarthi, Internet of Things and M2M Communication Technologies,
Architecture and Practical Design Approach to IoT in Industry 4.0, Springer 2021. ISBN
978-3-030-79271-8
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols, Wiley, 2012.
4. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis, Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand
and David Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things - Introduction to a
New Age of Intelligence, Elsevier, 2014.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2
 COURSE
COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE
UEC2H23 DATA SCIENCE FOR IoT 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
The intention and purpose of this course are to learn the basics of IoT architectural components for
efficient implementation of data analytics and data visualization tools to collect, store and analyse
IoT data.

OBJECTIVES
● To learn fundamentals of Data Science using Python
● To understand probability distributions and statistical Inferences
● To be familiar with supervised and unsupervised methods in machine learning
● To handle different databases and store values from sensors in the databases.
● To learn about visualization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE 9

Introduction: Need for data science, Facets of data, Big data ecosystem – The data science process:
Retrieving data – Cleansing, integrating and transforming data – Data analysis – Build the models
Toolbox - Introduction to Python: Fundamental Python Libraries for Data Scientists, Pandas,
Matplotlib; IDE Data Manipulation with Python - Examples

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO IOT ANALYTICS 9

Introduction to IoT - IoT architectures – IoT analytics challenges – IoT networking data messaging
protocols - Analyzing data to infer protocol and device characteristics

UNIT III EXPLORING IOT DATA 9

Exploring IoT Data: Exploring and visualizing data, Techniques to understand data quality, Basic
time series analysis, Statistical analysis - Data summarization – Data distribution – Outlier
Treatment – Measuring asymmetry – Continuous distribution
UNIT IV DATA SCIENCE FOR IOT ANALYTICS 9
Introduction to Machine Learning: Supervised: kNN classifier, Regression analysis: Linear
regression – Logistic regression – Unsupervised: Clustering - Feature engineering with IoT data,
Validation methods, Understanding the bias–variance trade-off, Case study: Use cases for deep
learning with IoT data

UNIT V STRATEGIES TO ORGANIZE DATA FOR ANALYTICS 9

Strategies to Organize Data for Analytics: Linked Analytical Datasets, Managing data lakes, data
retention strategy – Applications - Case study: IoT data analytics challenges in an organization.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Develop Python programs to perform analysis on data.

CO2: Understand various probability distributions and statistical inferences
CO3: Explore IoT data and summarize it for a specific application
CO4: Apply machine learning techniques for IoT analytics
CO5 Apply various strategies to organize IoT data

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Minteer, Andrew, Analytics for the Internet of Things (IoT), Packt Publishing Ltd., 2017
2. Kai Hwang, Min Chen, Big-Data Analytics for Cloud, IoT and Cognitive Computing,
Wiley, 2017
3. Hwaiyu Geng, Internet of Things and Data Analytics Handbook, Wiley, 2016

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 3 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2H24 SECURITY AND PRIVACY IN IoT 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
Security and privacy are important aspects of IoT networks. Given the widespread use of IoT
devices in many fields, keeping the network secure is becoming increasingly important. Similarly,
preserving data integrity is essential, especially when IoT sensors are used in sensitive applications.
This course provides learners an introduction to the security requirements in IoT architecture with
an indepth understanding about possible threats and attacks layer wise. Learners will get an
understanding about identity & access management solutions, privacy impact assessment along
with the understanding about need for security in cloud perspective.

OBJECTIVES
• To understand the layer wise security requirements in IoT architecture along with possible
threats and attacks.
• To introduce the cryptographic fundamentals required for securing IoT.
• To gain in-depth knowledge about identity and access management solutions.
• To explore the possible privacy challenges and the corresponding solutions.
• To understand the need for security from cloud perspective.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION: SECURING THE IoT 9

Security requirements in IoT architecture – Security issues in enabling technologies – Security
concerns in IoT applications – IoT Security Architecture – Sensing layer, network layer, service
layer and application layer – Threats to authorization/authentication, access control, privacy and
availability – Attacks specific to IoT.

UNIT II CRYPTOGRAPHIC FUNDAMENTALS FOR IoT 9

Types and uses of cryptographic primitives in IoT – Encryption and Decryption – Hashes – Digital
Signatures – Cryptographic key management fundamentals – Examining cryptographic controls
build into IoT messaging and communication protocols.

UNIT III IDENTITY AND ACCESS MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS 9

Introduction to identity and access management for IoT – Authentication credentials – passwords,
symmetric keys, certificates, and biometrics – Identity and Access Management (IAM)
Infrastructure – Authorization and access control, Case Study: Aadhar Registered Devices
Authentication.

UNIT IV MITIGATING IOT PRIVACY CONCERNS 9

Privacy challenges introduced by IoT – Privacy Impact Assessment – Privacy by design principles
– Privacy engineering recommendations.

UNIT V CLOUD SECURITY FOR INTERNET OF THINGS 9

Cloud Services for IoT – Asset and inventory management, Service provisioning billing and entitle
management, Real time monitoring, Sensor coordination, Customer intelligence and marketing,
Information sharing, Message transport & broadcast – Examining IoT threats from cloud
perspective – Exploring cloud service provider IoT offerings – Cloud IoT security control –
Tailoring an enterprise IoT cloud security architecture – New directions in cloud enabled IoT
computing.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
OUTCOMES

On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Outline the layer wise attacks possible in IoT.

CO2: Apply the fundamentals of cryptography in IoT.
CO3: Interpret the methods and solutions for authorization and access control
CO4: Analyze the principles, practices and policies associated with privacy issues.
CO5: Demonstrate the various cloud service provider IoT offerings with respective security
controls.

REFERENCES
1. Shancang Li, Li Da Xu, “Securing the Internet of Things”, Syngress, Elsevier Publishing,
2017.
2. Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren, “Practical Internet of Things Security”, Packt Publishing,
2018.
3. Fei Hu, “Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms and
Implementations”, CRC Press, 2016.
4. Alasdair Gilchrist, “IoT Security Issues”, Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co KG, 2017.
5. Shivani Agarwal, Sandhya Makkar, Duc-Tan Tran, “Privacy Vulnerabilities and Data
Security Challenges in the IoT”, CRC Press, 2020.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 2 2
COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
UEC2H25 INDUSTRIAL IoT 4.0 3 0 0 3

PREAMBLE
Industrial Internet of Things is a relatively new and emerging paradigm, which interconnects
sensors and actuators to enhance industrial working conditions, product quality, machine lifetime,
automated fault detection and maintenance, and optimal asset utilization. This course provides
learners an introduction to Industry IoT 4.0 and its applications in the business world. Learners will
get an understanding about various implementation systems for IIoT and the key enabling
technologies for IIoT.

OBJECTIVES
• To learn the fundamental concepts of Industry 4.0.
• To understand the business models and reference architecture of IIoT.
• To gain in-depth knowledge about various implementation systems for IIoT.
• To introduce the possible key enabling technologies for IIoT.
• To explore the challenges involved in providing IIoT as solution to real world applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL 4.0 9

Industry 4.0 – Phases of development & evolution, environmental impacts of industrial revolution,
Industrial internet and applications of industry 4.0 – Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT) –
Prerequisites of IIoT, Role of IoT & IIoT in industry, Basics of CPS, CPS & IIoT – Applications
of IIoT.

UNIT II INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS BASICS 9

Industrial internet systems – Industrial sensing – Industrial processes – Introduction to business
model – Business models of IIoT – Reference Architecture for IIoT – Categorization of reference
architecture in IIoT.

UNIT III IMPLEMENTATION SYSTEMS FOR IIoT 9

Sensors and Actuators, Industrial data transmission – Features & Components - Field bus, Modbus,
Controller Area Network, Wireless HART, LoRa and LoRaWAN, NBIoT & IEEE 802.11ah –
Industrial data acquisition – Introduction to IIoT analytics and predictive maintenance.

UNIT IV KEY ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES FOR IIoT 9

Cloud computing – Fog computing – Big data analytics – Augmented reality – Virtual reality –
Smart factories – Characteristics of smart factory, Technologies used in smart factory.

UNIT V IIoT APPLICATIONS 9

Healthcare – IIoT based healthcare system, Inventory Management & Quality Control, Plant Safety
and Security – Case study: Automotive industry – Background of the industry, Challenges, IIoT as
a solution, Benefits.

TOTAL PERIODS 45
OUTCOMES

On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Understand the benefits of Industry 4.0 and the role of IIoT in industry.
CO2: Demonstrate the business models of IIoT with the reference architecture.
CO3: Analyze various systems that can be used for implementing IIoT.
CO4: Identify the possible key enabling technologies for Industrial Internet of Things.
CO5: Analyze the challenges involved to provide IIoT as solution to various real world
applications

REFERENCES
1. S. Misra, C. Roy, and A. Mukherjee, “Introduction to Industrial Internet of Things and
Industry 4.0”, CRC Press, 2020.
2. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, Apress, 2016.
3. Ismail Butun, “Industrial IoT: Challenges, Design Principles, Applications and Security”,
Springer, 2020.
4. Sabina Jeschke, Christian Brecher, Houbing Song, Danda B. Rawat, “Industrial Internet of
Things: Cyber manufacturing Systems”, Springer, 2017.
5. Ovidiu Vermesan, Peter Friess, “Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart
Environments and Integrated Ecosystems”, River Publishers, 2013.

CO – PO AND PSO MAPPING

Program
Course Program Outcomes Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

CO1 3 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 2 3
 OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY OTHER DEPARTMENTS

OPEN ELECTIVE I (SEMESTER VI)

SL. DEPARTMENT COURSE

COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO OFFERING CODE
1 UEE2041 Autonomous Vehicles 3 0 0 3
2 EEE UEE2042 Sensors and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
3 UEE2043 Energy Management 3 0 0 3
6 UCS2041 Introduction to Data Structures 2 0 2 3
Object Oriented Programming
7 UCS2042 2 0 2 3
CSE Techniques
Problem Solving and
8 UCS2043 2 0 2 3
Programming in C
10 UIT2041 Introduction to AR and VR 2 0 2 3
Databases and Applications
UIT2042 2 0 2 3
Development
Introduction to Artificial
11 UIT2043 2 0 2 3
Intelligence
IT
Introduction to Data structures
12 UIT2044 2 0 2 3
and Algorithms
Introduction to Object-Oriented
13 UIT2045 2 0 2 3
Programming and Patterns
14 UIT2046 Introduction to Data Science 2 0 2 3
Principles of Biomedical
15 UBM2041 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
Materials for Biomedical
16 BME UBM2042 3 0 0 3
Applications
Hospital planning and Waste
17 UBM2043 3 0 0 3
Management
18 UCH2041 e-Waste Management 3 0 0 3
19 Chemical UCH2042 Nanoscience for Engineers 3 0 0 3
20 UCH2043 Sustainable Development 3 0 0 3
21 UME2041 Six Sigma Data analysis 2 0 2 3
22 Mechanical UME2042 Product Engineering 3 0 0 3
23 UME2043 Operations Management 3 0 0 3
24 UCE2041 Green Building Design 3 0 0 3
25 UCE2042 Sustainable Infrastructure 3 0 0 3

Civil Integrated Water Resource

26 UCE2043 3 0 0 3
Management
Environmental Impact
27 UCE2044 3 0 0 3
Assessment
28 PBA2041 Entrepreneurship 3 0 0 3
Supply Chain and Logistics
29 MBA PBA2042 3 0 0 3
Management
30 PBA2043 Design Thinking 2 0 2 3
31 Mathematics UMA2041 Graph Theory and Applications 3 0 0 3
Optical and luminescence
33 UPH2041 3 0 0 3
characteristics of materials
Nanotechnology and Imaging
34 Physics UPH2042 3 0 0 3
Techniques
Crystal growth and Radiation
36 UPH2044 3 0 0 3
detection Measurements
37 UEN2041 English for Career needs 2 0 2 3
Word power for Academic
38 UEN2042 2 0 2 3
English needs
Writing skills for university
39 UEN2043 2 0 2 3
admission
 OPEN ELECTIVE II (SEMESTER VIII)

SL. DEPARTMENT COURSE

COURSE TITLE L T P C
NO OFFERING CODE

1 UEE2044 Cyber Security in Smart Grid 3 0 0 3

FEA and CAD for
2 EEE UEE2045 3 0 0 3
Electromagnetic design
3 UEE2046 Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3
Introduction to Big Data
7 UCS2044 2 0 2 3
Analytics
CSE
8 UCS2045 Machine Learning Applications 2 0 2 3
9 UCS2046 Web Technology 2 0 2 3
10 UIT2047 Introduction to Cyber Security 2 0 2 3
Introduction to Software
11 UIT2048 2 0 2 3
Engineering
IoT Architectures and
12 UIT2049 2 0 2 3
IT Programming
13 UIT2051 Introduction to Deep learning 2 0 2 3
Introduction to Machine
14 UIT2052 2 0 2 3
learning
15 UIT2053 Web services and DevOps 2 0 2 3
16 UBM2044 Brain Machine Interface 3 0 0 3
17 BME UBM2045 Biomedical Physics 3 0 0 3
18 UBM2046 Telehealth Technology 3 0 0 3
19 UCH2044 Industrial Safety 3 0 0 3
Industrial Waste Management
20 Chemical UCH2045 3 0 0 3
and Audit
21 UCH2046 Energy Conservation and Audit 3 0 0 3
22 UME2044 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3
Project Management and
23 UME2045 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Planning
Introduction to Industrial
24 UME2046 3 0 0 3
Engineering
Experimental Techniques and
25 Civil UCE2045 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
 Air Pollution and Control
26 UCE2046 3 0 0 3
Engineering
27 UCE2047 Remote Sensing and GIS 3 0 0 3
UCE2048 Environmental Geo-technology 3 0 0 3
28 PBA2044 Innovation and Creativity 3 0 0 3
MBA
29 PBA2045 Intellectual Property Rights 3 0 0 3
Random Variables and Partial
30 Mathematics UMA2044 2 1 0 3
Differential Equations
31 UPH2045 Advanced Functional Materials 3 0 0 3
Physics
32 UPH2047 Astrophysics 3 0 0 3
33 UEN2044 Creative writing 2 1 0 3
English Introduction to Children's
34 UEN2045 2 0 2 3
literature